Menu

Luke 22:20 — Word Study

Depth

N1904καὶ τὸ ποτήριον ὡσαύτως μετὰ τὸ δειπνῆσαι λέγων· τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον καινὴ διαθήκη ἐν τῷ αἵματί μου τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐκχυννόμενον.

BSAandkai theho cuppotērion [the vessel used for the wine] likewise [likewise, in a similar manner] aftermeta theho eatingdeipneō saying;legō Thisohutos <the>ho cup [is]potērion [the contents of which represent my blood] theho newkainos [fresh, recently established] covenantdiathēkē [a formal agreement, a promise] inen theho bloodahima [the atoning blood of Christ, which is shed for the forgiveness of sins] of Meegō whichho forhuper yousu [on your behalf, for your benefit] is being poured out.ekcheō [shed, given]

Word
Listen & take awayLuke 22
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 20 is in this chapter.
Greek ↓ Download MP3 Nestle 1904 — the very text on this page — read by Andy Martin in Erasmian pronunciation.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (ekcheō) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Luke 22:20quick helps
In a sentenceJesus establishes a new covenant through His blood, symbolized by the cup shared at the Last Supper.
Who is speakingJesus, speaking to His disciples during the Last Supper.
Where we areThe Last Supper, a significant event before Jesus' crucifixion.
The hard wordδιαθήκη
Take awayThe new covenant is established through the sacrifice of Jesus.
6 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Ellicott, AdamClarke & more — read them › clause subjectλέγω verbδειπνέω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Luke 22:20

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The Last Suppergenerated

19And He took the bread, gave thanks and broke it, and gave it to them, saying, “This is My body, given for you; do this in remembrance of Me.”
20In the same way, after supper He took the cup, saying, “This cup is the new covenant in My blood, which is poured out for you.
21Look! The hand of My betrayer is with Mine on the table.
22Indeed, the Son of Man will go as it has been determined, but woe to that man who betrays Him.”

Luke 22:20 recounts Jesus' words during the Last Supper, where He takes the cup and indicates that it represents the new covenant established through His blood. This moment is pivotal in Christian theology, marking the transition from the old covenant to the new, as Jesus prepares for His impending sacrifice. The significance of this event is echoed in other passages, such as 1 Corinthians 11:25, where Paul reiterates the importance of this covenant in the practice of communion.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Exodus 24:8So Moses took the blood, sprinkled it on the people, and said, “This is the blood of the covenant that the LORD has made with you in accordance with all these words.”
2Zechariah 9:11As for you, because of the blood of My covenant, I will release your prisoners from the waterless pit.
31 Corinthians 10:16–21Is not the cup of blessing that we bless a participation in the blood of Christ? And is not the bread that we break a participation in the body of Christ?
41 Corinthians 11:25In the same way, after supper He took the cup, saying, “This cup is the new covenant in My blood; do this, as often as you drink it, in remembrance of Me.”
5Hebrews 8:6–13Now, however, Jesus has received a much more excellent ministry, just as the covenant He mediates is better and is founded on better promises.

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 8 references, hung on the phrase they belong to


The Key Word διαθήκη, diathēkēgenerated

The Greek word διαθήκη (diathēkē) translates as 'covenant' and refers to a formal agreement or promise, particularly in a religious context. It signifies the new relationship established between God and humanity through Jesus' sacrifice.

This term is often associated with the concept of a will or testament, indicating the binding nature of the promises made. In this verse, it emphasizes the new covenant Jesus is instituting with His blood, which is a central theme in Christian doctrine.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The verse is rendered in the Berean Standard Bible as 'This cup is the new covenant in My blood, which is poured out for you.' The KJV uses 'new testament' instead of 'new covenant', while the ASV retains 'new covenant'.

The translations differ primarily in the choice between 'covenant' and 'testament', with the KJV opting for 'testament' and the BSB and ASV consistently using 'covenant'. The phrase 'is being poured out' is rendered as 'shed' in the KJV and 'given' in the BBE.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb of the verse is λέγων, saying, which governs the clause and introduces the statement about the cup. The structure consists of a series of phrases that detail the actions and descriptions surrounding the cup and its significance.

The verse features a noun phrase ποτήριον (poterion), which serves as the subject of the statement, followed by a predicate that identifies it as the new covenant, emphasizing the relationship between the cup and the covenant established through Jesus' blood.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

διαθήκη is used in the Septuagint to translate the Hebrew word for 'covenant', which signifies a formal agreement or promise, similar to its usage in this verse. It connects the New Testament understanding of God's promises with the Old Testament foundations.

The term appears in contexts that highlight God's commitments to His people, reinforcing the continuity of God's redemptive plan through both the old and new covenants.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Luke 22:20 describes Jesus taking a cup after the meal and declaring it to be the new covenant in His blood. This signifies a new agreement between God and His people, established through His sacrifice, which is a central aspect of Christian faith.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does the new covenant mean?

The new covenant refers to the agreement established by Jesus through His death and resurrection, offering forgiveness of sins and a restored relationship with God, as seen in passages like Hebrews 9:15.

Why is the cup significant in this context?

The cup symbolizes Jesus' blood, which is shed for the forgiveness of sins, marking the establishment of the new covenant, as referenced in 1 Corinthians 11:25.

How does this relate to the Old Testament?

The new covenant fulfills the promises made in the Old Testament, particularly in the context of God's relationship with His people, as seen in Jeremiah 31:31.

What is the importance of Jesus' blood in this verse?

Jesus' blood represents the sacrificial aspect of the new covenant, essential for atonement and reconciliation with God, as highlighted throughout the New Testament.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. What does the concept of the new covenant mean to me personally?
  2. How can I better understand the significance of Jesus' sacrifice in my life?
  3. In what ways can I reflect on the meaning of communion and the covenant during the Lord's Supper?
  4. How does the idea of being in a covenant relationship with God influence my daily decisions?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Early church writers reference this verse to discuss the significance of the new covenant established by Christ, highlighting its theological implications.

TertullianAgainst Marcion Book IV c. 155–220
He likewise, when mentioning the cup and making the new testament to be sealed "in His blood," affirms the reality of His body.
Early Church Fathers on Luke 22 →
TertullianOn Fasting c. 155–220
Plainly we do, if we are observers of Jewish ceremonies, of legal solemnities: for those the apostle unteaches, suppressing the continuance of the Old Testament which has been buried in Christ, and establishing that of the New.
Early Church Fathers on Luke 22 →
Cyril of AlexandriaCOMMENTARY ON LUKE, HOMILY 142 c. 376–444
By uniting flesh that was subject to death to himself, the Word being God and life drove corruption away from it. Christ also made it to be the source of life.
Early Church Fathers on Luke 22 →

Commentators on this verse — 6 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Luke 22:20 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

Likewise also the cup after supper,.... Both after the passover, and the Lord's supper; that is, he took the cup after they had eaten the bread, and gave thanks over it, and gave it to his disciples,

Read John Gill on Luke 22 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

Likewise also the cup after supper, saying, This cup is the new testament in my blood, which is shed for you.

Read Robert Jamieson on Luke 22 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(20) This cup is the new testament in my blood.—Better, New Covenant. The adjective is, in the best MSS., peculiar to St. Luke, as also is the “shed for you” instead of “shed for many.” The participle is in the present tense, which is being shed, like the being given, in Luke 22:19. St. Paul and St. Luke agree in placing the giving of the cup “after they had supped.” (See Note on Matthew 26:28.)

Read Charles John Ellicott on Luke 22 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 20. This cup is the new testament in my blood] Perhaps it might be better to paraphrase the passage thus: This cup which is poured out for you, signifies the blood of the new covenant, which is shortly to be ratified in (or by) the shedding of my blood. Or, This cup is the new covenant, poured out for you with my blood: - that is, the paschal sacrifice and my sacrifice happen together. But see Kypke. It does not appear that our Lord handed either the bread or the cup to each person; he gave it to him who was next to him, and, by handing it from one to another, they shared it among themselves, Lu 22:17. In this respect the present mode of administering the Lord's Supper is not strictly…

Read AdamClarke on Luke 22 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

20. the new testament] Hence the name of the New Testament. The word Diatheke (Heb. Berith) means both a will, and an agreement or covenant, see Jeremiah 31:31. “It contains all the absolute elements of the one, with the conditional elements of the other. Hence the New Testament (kaine Diatheke) is the revelation of a new relation on God’s part with the conditions necessary to its realisation on man’s part.” Fairbairn.in my blood] i.e. ratified by my blood shed for you. The best comment is Hebrews 9:15; Hebrews 9:18-22; 1 Corinthians 11:25. The other Synoptists have “my blood of the New Testament.”

Read Cambridge on Luke 22 →
Daniel Denison Whedon1808–1885Whedon's Commentary on the Bible

§§ 126, 128. THE OF THE LORD’S SUPPER, Luke 22:19-20.See notes on Matthew 26:26; Mark 14:22.20. This cup is the new testament—The Greek word for testament should be rendered covenant.

Read Daniel Denison Whedon on Luke 22 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

In the same way, after supper He took the cup, saying, “This cup is the new covenant in My blood, which is poured out for you.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

Likewise, he took the cup after supper, saying, “This cup is the new covenant in my blood, which is poured out for you.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

In the same way, after supper He took the cup, saying, “This cup is the new covenant in My blood, which is poured out for you.

NETBNew English Translation2006

And in the same way he took the cup after they had eaten, saying, “This cup that is poured out for you is the new covenant in my blood.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

Likewise also the cup after supper, saying, This cup is the new testament in my blood, which is shed for you.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

And the cup in like manner after supper, saying, This cup is the new covenant in my blood, even that which is poured out for you.

RVARevised Version, American1894

And the cup in like manner after supper, saying, This cup is the new covenant in my blood, even that which is poured out for you.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

Likewise also the cup after supper, saying, This cup is the new testament in my blood, which is shed for you.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

Likewise also after supper he tooke the cup, saying, This cup is that newe Testament in my blood, which is shed for you.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

In like manner also the cup, after having supped, saying, This cup [is] the new covenant in my blood, which is poured out for you.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

In like manner, also, the cup after the supping, saying, 'This cup [is] the new covenant in my blood, that for you is being poured forth.

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

In like manner, also, the cup after the dining, saying, “This cup [is] the New Covenant in My blood, that is being poured forth for you.

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

He took the cup in the same way after supper, saying, “This cup is the new covenant in my blood, which is poured out for you.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

In like manner the chalice also, after he had supped, saying: This is the chalice, the new testament in my blood, which shall be shed for you.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

In the same way after they had finished supper, he picked up the cup and said, “This cup is the new agreement in my blood which is poured out for you.”

BBEBible in Basic English1949

And in the same way, after the meal, he took the cup, saying, This cup is the new testament, made with my blood which is given for you.

Word by word, the decisions they made

ἐκχυννόμενον.ekcheō is being poured out. G1632 3 different renderings
poured outASV BSB DBY FBV MSB NETB RVA ULB WEB
shedDRA GNV KJV NWB
givenBBE

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseκαὶandclausenoun phrase · objectτὸtheποτήριονcupadverbialὡσαύτωςlikewiseprepositional phrase · adverbialμετὰafternoun phraseτὸwhichclauseverbδειπνῆσαιhaving suppedclause · adverbialclauseverbλέγωνsayingclauseclausenoun phrase · predicatethenoun phraseκαινὴnewnoun phraseδιαθήκηcovenantprepositional phraseἐνinnoun phraseτῷthenoun phraseαἵματίbloodμουof Menoun phrase · subjectnoun phraseΤοῦτοThisnoun phraseτὸ-ποτήριονcup [is]noun phraseτὸwhichclauseprepositional phrase · adverbialὑπὲρforὑμῶνyouverbἐκχυννόμενονis being poured outπλὴνButclauseverbἰδοὺbeholdclausenoun phrase · subjectthenoun phraseχεὶρhandnoun phraseτοῦof himclauseverbπαραδιδόντοςbetrayingobjectμεMeprepositional phrase · adverbialμετ’[is] withἐμοῦMeprepositional phrase · predicateἐπὶonnoun phraseτῆςtheτραπέζηςtableclauseὅτιForclauseμὲνindeedclausenoun phrase · subjectthenoun phraseΥἱὸςSonnoun phraseτοῦofἀνθρώπουmanprepositional phrase · adverbialκατὰaccording tonoun phraseτὸthatclauseverbὡρισμένονhaving been determinedverbπορεύεταιgoesπλὴνbutclausesubjectοὐαὶwoenoun phrase · indirect objectnoun phrasenoun phraseτῷto theἀνθρώπῳmanἐκείνῳthatclauseprepositional phrase · adverbialδι’byοὗwhomverbπαραδίδοταιHe is betrayed

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Similiter et calicem, postquam cœnavit, dicens : Hic est calix novum testamentum in sanguine meo, qui pro vobis fundetur.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܗܟܘܬ ܐܦ ܥܠ ܟܣܐ ܡܢ ܒܬܪ ܕܐܚܫܡܘ ܐܡܪ ܗܢܐ ܟܣܐ ܕܝܬܩܐ ܚܕܬܐ ܒܕܡܝ ܕܚܠܦܝܟܘܢ ܡܬܐܫܕ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

καὶ τὸ ποτήριον ὡσαύτως μετὰ τὸ δειπνῆσαι λέγων· τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον καινὴ διαθήκη ἐν τῷ αἵματί μου τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐκχυννόμενον.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

καὶ τὸ ποτήριον ὡσαύτως μετὰ τὸ δειπνῆσαι λέγων· τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον καινὴ διαθήκη ἐν τῷ αἵματί μου τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐκχυννόμενον.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

καὶ τὸ ποτήριον ὡσαύτως μετὰ τὸ δειπνῆσαι λέγων· τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον καινὴ διαθήκη ἐν τῷ αἵματί μου τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐκχυννόμενον.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

καὶ τὸ ποτήριον ὡσαύτως μετὰ τὸ δειπνῆσαι λέγων· τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον καινὴ διαθήκη ἐν τῷ αἵματί μου τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐκχυννόμενον.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

καὶ τὸ ποτήριον ὡσαύτως μετὰ τὸ δειπνῆσαι λέγων· τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον καινὴ διαθήκη ἐν τῷ αἵματί μου τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐκχυννόμενον.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

καὶ τὸ ποτήριον ὡσαύτως μετὰ τὸ δειπνῆσαι λέγων· τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον καινὴ διαθήκη ἐν τῷ αἵματί μου τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐκχυννόμενον.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

καὶ τὸ ποτήριον μετὰ τὸ δειπνῆσαι λέγων· τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον καινὴ διαθήκη ἐν τῷ αἵματί μου τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐκχυννόμενον.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

καὶ τὸ ποτήριον μετὰ τὸ δειπνῆσαι λέγων· τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον καινὴ διαθήκη ἐν τῷ αἵματί μου τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐκχυννόμενον.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
ὡσαύτως likewiseNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, TregTR, Byz

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Luke 22:20καίandandκαίthetheποτήριονcupcupποτήριονὡσαύτωςlikewiselikewiseὡσαύτωςμετάafterafterμετάthetheδειπνέωeatingeatingδειπνέωλέγωsaying;saying;λέγωοὗτοςThisThisοὗτος<the><the>ποτήριονcup [is]cup [is]ποτήριονthetheκαινόςnewnewκαινόςδιαθήκηcovenantcovenantδιαθήκηἐνininἐνthetheαἷμαbloodbloodαἷμαμουof Meof Meμουwhichwhichὑπέρforforὑπέρσύyouyouσύἐκχέωis being pois being pouredἐκχέωἐκPrep. fromPrep. from out,ἐκπίνωv. I drinkv. I drink, imbπίνωδεῖπνονn.n. a dinn.n. a dinner, δεῖπνονδιατίθημιv. I appoiv. I appoint, mδιατίθημιὡςAdv as, liAdv as, like asὡςαὐτόςPers.pr. hPers.pr. he, shαὐτόςπρόςPrep. to, Prep. to, towarπρόςἀπόPrep. fromPrep. from, awaἀπόφημίv. I sayv. I sayφημίνέοςAdj young,Adj young, new,νέοςεἰςPrep. intoPrep. into, in,εἰςπαραφέρωv. I turn v. I turn asideπαραφέρωἔξωθενAdv from wAdv from withouἔξωθενἀμήνHebr. veriHebr. verily, tἀμήνἀσκόςn.m. a winn.m. a wine-skiἀσκόςδιαθήκηn.f. a covn.f. a covenantδιαθήκησεμνόςAdj honoraAdj honorableσεμνόςποτήριονn.n. a drin.n. a drinkingποτήριον
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Luke 22:20

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
τὸho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASN — Article · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
ποτήριονpotērion cup G4221 Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
31× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A cup is a drinking vessel, like the one Jesus used at the Last Supper in Matthew 26:27. It can also mean the contents of the cup or a person's fate. In 1 Corinthians 11:25, it refers to the cup of blessing.
Amplified meaning
the vessel used for the wine
Tyndale gloss
cup
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ποτήριον (poterion) means a drinking cup or wine cup, derived from ποτήρ (potēr). It is used in the New Testament to refer to both the physical vessel and its contents, often in a metaphorical sense related to divine experiences, such as suffering or blessings. The word appears in various contexts, including the Eucharist and references to God's providence.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ποτήριον, -ου, τό, dimin. of ποτήρ

(< πίνω),

[in LXX chiefly for כּוֹס;]

a wine cup: Mt 23:25, 26 26:27, Mk 7:4 14:23, Lk 11:39 22:17, 20a (WH, R, mg., om.), I Co 11:25, Re 17:4; πίνειν ἐκ τοῦ π., I Co 11:28; c. gen. rei, Mt 10:42, Mk 9:41; τ. εὐλογίας, I Co 10:16; by meton., of the contents of the cup, Lk 22:20b (WH, R, mg., om.), I Co 11:25, 26; c. gen. pers., I Co 10:21 11:27.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ποτήριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of ποτήρ), a cup, a drinking vessel; a. prop.: Mt. xxiii. 25 sq.; xxvi. 27; Mk. vi. 4, 8 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; xiv. 23; Lk. xi. 39; xxii. 17, 20; 1 Co. xi. 25; Rev. xvii. 4; πίνειν ἐκ τοῦ ποτηρίου, 1 Co. xi. 28; τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας (see εὐλογία, 4), 1 Co. x. 16; with agen. of the thing with which the cup is filled: ψυχροῦ, Mt. x. 42; ὕδατος, Mk. ix. 41; by meton. of the container for the contained, the contents of the cup, what is offered to be drunk, Lk. xxii. 20

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ποτήριον. P Tebt I. 657 (B.c. 140-139) φιάλας καὶ ποτήρια, ‘bowls and cups,” P Ryl 11. 127%! (A.D. 29) ποτήρια κασσιδί(έρινα) B, “2 drinking-cups of tin,” P Fay 12712 (ii/iii a.p.) pikdv ποτήριν Θεονᾶτι τῷ pK (k>®@ (a Doric form: Thumb e//en. p. 60), ‘‘a little cup for little Theonas,” and from the inscrr. Sy// 226 (=%495)'4 (c. B.C. 230) τὰ ἱερὰ ποτήρια. The word is fully illustrated in S4J7 iii. p- 142 ff. With Mt 23*°# we may compare ποτηροπλύτης, ** washer of cups’’ in Os¢r 1218° (Rom.).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ποτήριον (potērion) — cup.

ποτήριον, τό,

drinking-cup, wine-cup, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; οὔποτ᾽ ἐκ ταὐτοῦ μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν πίεται π.[Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. the Cup in the Eucharist, [NT]

3. jar, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

4. receptacle for offerings in temples, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

II. absorbent preparation, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

III. see at {ποτίρριον}.

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ποτήριον

poterion

neuter of a derivative of the alternate of 4095; a drinking-vessel; by

extension, the contents thereof, i.e. a cupful (draught);

figuratively, a lot or fate:--cup.

see GREEK for 4095

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ποτήριον, ου, τό

n.n.

a drinking cup

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ποτήριον potērion 31x

a vessel for drinking, cup, Mt. 10:42; 23:25, 26; meton. the contents of a cup, liquor contained in a cup, Lk. 22:20; 1 Cor. 10:16; from the Hebrew, the cup or potion of what God’s administration deals out, Mt. 20:22, 23; Rev. 14:10

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ποτήριον ποτήριον, ου, τό, ΠΟ, Root of some tenses of πίνω a drinking-cup, wine-cup, Hdt., attic

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASN — Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

(Most frequently, koc; four other words in one passage each; poterion): A vessel for drinking from, of a variety of material (gold, silver, earthenware), patterns (Es 1:7) and elaboration.

Figurative: By ordinary figure of speech, put sometimes for the contents of the cup, namely, for that which is drunk (Mt 26:39). In both Old Testament and New Testament applied figuratively to that which is portioned out, and of which one is to partake; most frequently used of what is sorrowful, as God's judgments, His wrath, afflictions, etc. (Ps 11:6; 75:8; Isa 51:17; Re 14:10). In a similar sense, used by Christ concerning the…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Cup

A wine-cup (Gen. 40:11, 21), various forms of which are found on Assyrian and Egyptian monuments. All Solomon’s drinking vessels were of gold (1 Kings 10: 21). The cups mentioned in the New Testament were made after Roman and Greek models, and were sometimes of gold (Rev. 17:4).

The art of divining by means of a cup was practiced in Egypt (Gen. 44:2-17), and in the East generally.

The “cup of salvation” (Ps. 116:13) is the cup of thanksgiving for the great salvation. The “cup of consolation” (Jer. 16:7) refers to the custom of friends sending viands and wine to console relatives in mourning (

The cups of the Jews, whether of metal or earthenware, were possibly borrowed, in point of shape and design, from Egypt and from the Phoenicians, who were celebrated in that branch of workmanship. Egyptian cups were of various shapes, either with handles or without them. In Solomon’s time all his drinking vessels were of gold, none of silver. (1 Kings 10:21) Babylon is compared to a golden cup. (Jeremiah 51:7) The great laver, or "sea," was made with a rim like the rim of a cup (cos), with flowers of lilies," (1 Kings 7:26) a form which the Persepolitan cups resemble. The cups of the New Testament were often no doubt formed on Greek and Roman models. They were sometimes of gold. (

This word is taken in Scripture both in a proper and in a figurative sense. In a proper sense, it signifies a common cup, of horn, or some precious metal, Ge 40:13 44:2 1Ki 7:26, such as is used for drinking out of at meals; or a cup of ceremony, used at solemn and religious meals-as at the Passover, when the father of the family pronounced certain blessings over the cup, and having tasted it, passed it round to the company and his whole family, who partook of it, 1Co 10:16. In a figurative sense, a cup is spoken of as filled with the portion given to one by divine providence, Ps 11:6 16:5; with the blessings of life and of grace,

Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 26 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Josephus The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaOn Dreams 2.159c. AD 40

καὶ ἔλαβον τὴν σταφυλὴν καὶ ἐξέθλιψα αὐτὴν εἰς τὸ ποτήριον, καὶ ἔδωκα τὸ ποτήριον εἰς τὰς χεῖρας Φαραώ“ (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 8.48c. AD 75–95

βουλόμενος δὲ πεῖσαι καὶ παραστῆσαι τοῖς παρατυγχάνουσιν ὁ Ἐλεάζαρος, ὅτι ταύτην ἔχει τὴν ἰσχύν, ἐτίθει μικρὸν ἔμπροσθεν ἤτοι ποτήριον πλῆρες ὕδατος ἢ ποδόνιπτρον καὶ τῷ δαιμονίῳ προσέταττεν ἐξιὸν τἀνθρώπου ταῦτα ἀνατρέψαι καὶ παρασχεῖν ἐπιγνῶναι…

The DidacheThe Didache 9.2c. AD 100

πρῶτον περὶ τοῦ ποτηρίου: Εὐχαριστοῦμέν σοι, πάτερ ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ τῆς ἁγίας ἀμπέλου Δαυεὶδ τοῦ παιδός σου, ἦς ἐγνώρισας ἡμῖν διὰ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ παιδός σου: σοὶ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD 1st c. BC 3rd c. BC
BGU 16 2671Herakleopolites22 BC–AD 5

λόγος δαπάνης κοινῆς ὑποκειμένων Τρύ … φωνι ὡς εἰς βιβλιοθήκην διʼ Ἀντιγόνωι δραχμὰς φ ποτηρίων καὶ ἡμικυτυλῶν δραχμὰς τμ … ουθδα δραχμὰς ξγ … Ἀλεξάνδρη παιδα῾ρί ?̓ Ἀπελλᾷ σ

P.Ryl. 2 136Euhemeria (ArsinoitesAD 34

ἀπὸ Εὐημερίας τῆς Θεμίστου μερίδος ὑπὲρ ὧν ἤροσάν μου ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας λῃστρικῷ τρόπωι ποτηρίων κασσιτερίνων καὶ κελλίβατος καὶ ἄλλων σκευῶν καὶ ἀργυρίου δραχμῶν ξ ὕβριν μοι συνεστήσατο οὐ

P.Oxy. 10 1269OxyrhynchosAD 101–AD 125

τοῦ Θέωνος μετὰ τὴν τελευτὴν τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ Ἰσᾶτος δραχμῶν τεσσαράκοντα , μεγάλην κίστην χαλκοῦν, ποτήριον κασσιτέρινον ἓν καὶ ἀργυρίου ἓν , κερβικάριον … νον

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
ὡσαύτως likewise G5615
17× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means likewise or in the same way, showing a similarity. It's used in Matthew 20:5 and Romans 8:26 to show that things are done in a similar manner. It helps to compare actions or events.
Amplified meaning
likewise, in a similar manner
Tyndale gloss
likewise
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὡσαύτως is an adverb meaning 'in like manner' or 'likewise,' formed from ὡς and αὔτως. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, often requiring a verb to be supplied from the surrounding text, as seen in Matthew 20:5 and Romans 8:26. The lexicons consistently define it as indicating similarity or agreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὡσαύτως

adv.,

strengthened for ὡς (in Hom, at the beginning of a clause, in the form ὣς δ' αὔτως, later in one word), in like manner, just so, likewise: Mt 20:5 21:30, 36 25:17, Mk 14:31, Lk 13:5 20:31, Ro 8:26, I Ti 5:25, Tit 2:6; with verb to be supplied from context, Mk 12:21, Lk 22:20, I Co 11:25, I Ti 2:9 3:8 3:11, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὡσ-αύτως, (ὡς and αὔτως), adv., [asa single word, PostHomeric], in like manner, likewise: put after the verb, Mt. xx. 5; xxi. 30,36; put before the verb, Mk. xiv. 31; Lk. xiii. 3 (here L T Tr WH ὁμοίως), 5 (T Trtxt. WH); Ro. viii. 26; 1 Tim. v. 25; Tit. ii. 6; as often in Grk. writ. the verb must be supplied from the preceding context, Mt. xxv.17; Mk. xii. 21; Lk. xx. 31; xxii. 20 [WH reject the pass.]; 1 Co. xi. 25; 1 Tim. ii. 9 (sc. βούλομαι, ef. 8); iii. 8 (sc. δεῖ, cf. 7), 11; Tit. ii. 3 (se. πρέπει εἶναι)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὡσαύτως, ‘cin like manner,” ‘‘likewise ” : 238) Κάλας τέτακται συναντήσεσθαι πρὸς σὲ. δὲ καὶ τῶι ᾿Ακολλούθωι παρηγγείλαμεν συναντᾶν πρὸς σέ, P Eleph 20° (iii/B.c.) ὡσαύτως παστοφόριον ἐν Τεντύρει ἐντὸς τείχους, P Petr Il. 4 (11)® (111.8.6.) ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ σχοινία p, ἐὰν δὲ ὑπάρχηι πλέω σ, ““ likewise, too, 100 ropes, but if you have plenty, 200,” in connexion with building operations, P Ry] II. 130! (A.p. 31) ἔτι δὲ καὶ πλειστάκι ὡσαύτως ἐτρύγησαν Kal ἀπηνέγκαντο, **moreover they repeatedly gathered them in the same way and carried them off,” of thieves in an olive-yard, P Oxy IL. 26719 (agreement of marriage—a.D. 36) προσομολογῶι ἐὰν ὡσαύτως ἐκ διαφορᾶς ἀπίαλλαγ]ῶμεν ἀπ᾽ ἀλλήλων... ., “J further agree if as aforesaid owing to a quarrel we separate from each other. . .” (Edd.), similarly 24. III. 49614 (A.D. 127), and Preisigke 5114}7} (A.D. 613-640). P Hamb I. 2514 (B.c. εν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὡσαύτως (hōsautōs) — likewise.

ὡσαύτως,

adverb of ὁ αὐτός, in like manner, just so, used by [Refs 8th c.BC+].. in like manner as.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to ὡς ἑτέρως, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. further strengthened, ὡ. οὕτως so in like manner, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὡσαύτως

hosautos

from 5613 and an adverb from 846; as thus, i.e. in the same way:--even

so, likewise, after the same (in like) manner.

see GREEK for 5613

see GREEK for 846

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὡσαύτως

Adv

likewise

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὡσαύτως hōsautōs 17x

just so, in just the same way or manner, likewise, Mt. 20:5; 21:30

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὡσαύτως ὥς, αὔτως in like manner, just so, ὣς δ᾽ αὔτως, for ὡσαύτως δὲ . . , Hom., etc.; ὡσαύτως καὶ . . in like manner as . . , Hdt.; so c. dat., ὣς δ᾽ αὔτως τῇσι κυσὶ θάπτονται id. Hdt.; ὡς. ἔχειν Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%likewise
likewise100% · 18×

18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial77%predicate6%object6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 17 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ποιέωI do, makeλαμβάνωI receive, take
ποιέωI do, make
ὥραan hour, season
λέγωI say, speak
δεύτερος& Adv
τρίτος& Adv
Article the
ἀπαρνέομαιI deny, disown, disr
σύ
ὡσαύτωςlikewise17×
what comes after →
δέbut, on the other ha
καίand, even, also,
Article the
δέbut, on the otheArticle the
καίand, even, also, nam
Article the
σεμνόςhonorable
μήNeg
ἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose, am

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὡσαύτως · 17× in the New Testament
1 Timothy Matthew Luke Mark Titus 1 Corinthians Romans
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 16 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria The Didache The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 54c. AD 40

ὑπὸ γὰρ φωτὸς ἄνω παραπεμφθεῖσα ἡ ὅρασις καὶ κατιδοῦσα φύσιν ἀστέρων καὶ κίνησιν αὐτῶν ἐναρμόνιον, ἀπλανῶν τε καὶ πλανήτων εὖ διατεταγμένας περιφοράς, τῶν μὲν κατὰ ταὐτὰ καὶ ὡσαύτως περιπολούντων, τῶν δ’ ἀνομοίως τε καὶ ὑπεναντίως διτταῖς περιόδοις…

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 43.3c. AD 96

καὶ κλείσας τὴν σκηνὴν ἐσφράγισεν τὰς κλεῖδας ὡσαύτως καὶ τὰς ῥάβδους,

The DidacheThe Didache 11.11c. AD 100

πᾶς δὲ προφήτης δεδοκιμασμένος, ἀληθινός, ποιῶν εἰς μυστήριον κοσμικὸν ἐκκλησίας, μὴ διδάσκων δὲ ποιεῖν, ὅσα αὐτὸς ποιεῖ, οὐ κριθήσεται ἐφ̓ ὑμῶν: μετὰ θεοῦ γὰρ ἔχει τὴν κρίσιν: ὡσαύτως γὰρ ἐποίησαν καὶ οἱ ἀρχαῖοι προφῆται.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC 2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD

γενέθλια τοῦ βασιλέως καὶ βασιλίσσης οἴνου παλαιοῦ εὐώδους κεράμια ὅσα ἄν σοι δόξῃ, ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ ἱερεῖα … προαπο … ν … εἰς τὴν ἑορτὴν

P.Grenf. 1 42Diospolis Parva170 BC–169 BC

ἐν Πτολεμαΐδι ὑπαίθρωι ἱππεῖς, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοὺς τεταγμένους ἐν τοῖς Χηνοβοσκίοις τοῦ αὐτοῦ νομοῦ, ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ παρὰ τοὺς … πεζοὺς καὶ τοὺς ἐν τοῖς ἄλλοις τόποις τεταγμένους μισθοφόρους

Σαντοβίθυος τοῦ στρατηγοῦ … συνσχεθεὶς ἠξίωσεν ὡς μετὰ τὴν δίεσιν παντὶ δίκαιον … ου. Ὡσαύτως ἐπὶ Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπὶ τοῦ Παθυρίτου … μων κληρονομίαν καὶ συνγραφὴν πατρικῆς … ὑπογράφει

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
μετὰmeta after G3326 Preposition
470× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Means with or after, showing accompaniment, as in being among a group or following someone, like Jesus with his disciples in Mark 1:13. It can also show cause and effect. The KJV translates it as after, among, or with. It is used in many New Testament books, including Matthew and Luke.
Tyndale gloss
with/after
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word μετά (transliterated as meta) is a preposition that can mean 'with,' 'among,' or 'after,' depending on the case it governs (genitive, accusative, or sometimes dative). In the New Testament, it is used to indicate association or companionship, as in Mark 1:29, and to denote sequence in time or place, as seen in Hebrews 9:3. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μετά (before vowel μετ’; on the neglect of elision in certain cases, V. WH, App., 146b),

prep. c. gen., acc. (in poet, also c. dat.),

[in LXX for אֵת, עִם, אַחַד, etc.;].

C. gen.,

among, amid: Mk 1:13, Lk 22:37 (LXX, ἐν) 24:5, Jo 18:5, al.; διωγμῶν, Mk 10:30.

Of association and companionship, with (in which sense it gradually superseded σύν, than which it is much more freq. in NT; cf. Bl., § 42, 3): c. gen. pers., Mt 8:11 20:20, Mk 1:29 3:7, Lk 5:30, Jo 3:22, Ga 2:1, al. mult.; εἶναι μετά…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μετά, [on its neylect of elision before proper names beginning with a vowel, and before sundry other words (at least in Tdf.’s text) see Tdf. Proleg. p. 95; cf. WH. Intr. p- 146°; W.§ 5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition, akin to μέσος (as Germ. mit to Mitte, mitten) and hence prop. in the midst of, amid, denoting association, union, accompaniment; [but some recent etymologists doubt its kinship to μέσος ; some connect it rather with ἅμα, Germ. sammt, ef. Curtius § 212; Vaniéek p. 972]. It takes the gen. and ace. (in the Grk. poets also the dat.). [On the distinetion between μετά and σύν, see σύν, init. ] I. with the Genitive (Sept. for ΠΝ, DY, WM, ete.); among, with, [ef. W. 376 (352) sq.]; 1. amid, among ; a. prop.: μετὰ τῶν νεκρῶν, among the dead, Lk. xxiv. 5 (μετὰ νεκρῶν κείσομαι, Eur. Hee. 209; θάψετέ με μετὰ τῶν πατέρων μου, Gen. xlix. 29 Sept.; μετὰ ζώντων εἶναι, to be among the…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μετά. In the NT (as in classical prose) μετά is construed only with the gen. and the acc., and the various shades of meaning connected with these two usages can be readily illustrated from our sources. (1) c. gen.—(a) For the ordinary meaning ‘‘ with,” ‘in company with,” we may cite P Eleph 11° (B.c. 311-10) (= Selections, p. 4) τοὶ pera Δημητρίας, “those acting with Demetria,’’ P Tebt I. 3519 (B.C. 111) ὃς κ[α]ὶ μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν ὑπὸ | τὴν ἐντολὴν e(om.) ὑπογράφει, ‘* who shall append his signature to the edict together with yours ” (Edd.), P Amh IT. 1355} | (early 1i/A.D.) ἐρρῶσθαί σε ed ) μετὰ τῶν τέ δ: A parallel to this &r. εἰρ. = ‘‘partition-wall” (Eph 214). (early ΠΑ: ἐρρῷσθαύσε etx (ou) here rey τευ ΠΣ a pray for your health and for that of your children” (Edd.), P Oxy III. 5314 (ii/A.D.) ἡδέως σε ἀσπαζόμεθα πάντες οἱ ἐν (= Selections, p. 102) καλῶς ἐποίησες οὐκ ἀπένηχές (/, ἀπήνεγκες)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μετά (meta) — with/after.

μετά [ᾰ,

but ᾱ in [Refs 5th c.BC+]], poetry μεταί, uncertain, only in μεταιβολί; Aeolic dialect, Doric dialect, [Refs 4th c.AD+]: preposition with genitive, dative, and accusative (Cf. Goth. mip, OHG. miti, mit 'with'.)

__A WITH GEN. (in which use μ. gradually superseded σύν, which see),

__A.I in the midst of, among, between, with plural Nouns, μετ᾽ ἄλλων λέξο ἑταίρων [Refs 8th c.BC+] with one, [Refs 5th c.BC+], i.e. among no men, [Refs]

__A.II in common, along with, by aid of (implying a closer union than σύν), μ. Βοιωτῶν ἐμάχοντο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; συνδιεπολέμησαν τὸν πόλεμον μ. Ἀθηναίων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μ. τῆς βουλῆς in co-operation with the council, [Refs 8th c.BC+] with, i.e. by aid of, Athena, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μ. τινὸς πάσχειν, δρᾶν τι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μ. τινὸς εἶναι to be on one's side, [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μετά

meta

a primary preposition (often used adverbially); properly, denoting

accompaniment; "amid" (local or causal); modified variously according

to the case (genitive association, or accusative succession) with

which it is joined; occupying an intermediate position between 575 or

1537 and 1519 or 4314; less intimate than 1722 and less close than

4862):--after(-ward), X that he again, against, among, X and,

+ follow, hence, hereafter, in, of, (up-)on, + our, X and

setting, since, (un-)to, + together, when, with (+ -out). Often used

in composition, in substantially the same relations of participation

or proximity, and transfer or sequence.

see GREEK for 4314

see GREEK for 575

see GREEK for 1537

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1722

see GREEK for 4862

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μετά

Prep.

with, after

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μετά meta 469x

(1) gen., with, together with, Mt. 16:27; 12:41; 26:55; with, on the same side or party with, in aid of, Mt. 12:30; 20:20; with, by means of, Acts 13:17; with, of conflict, Rev. 11:7; with, among, Lk. 24:5; with, to, towards, Lk. 1:58, 72; (2) acc., after, of place, behind, Heb. 9:3; of time, after, Mt. 17:1; 24:29; followed by an infin. with the neut. article, after, after that, Mt.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μετά in the midst of, among with gen., dat., and acc.

Prep. with gen., dat., and acc.

WITH GEN. in the midst of, among a number, μετ᾽ ἄλλων ἑταίρων Od.; πολλῶν μετὰ δούλων Aesch.

in common, along with, μετὰ Βοιωτῶν ἐμάχοντο Il.; μ. ξυμμάχων κινδυνεύειν Thuc.; μετά τινος πάσχειν, στῆναι Aesch., Soph.

with, by means of, ἱκετεύειν μετὰ δακρύων Plat.; μετ᾽ ἀρετῆς πρωτεύειν Xen.:—as a periphr. for Adverbs, ὁσίως καὶ μετ᾽ ἀληθείας Plat.

WITH DAT., only poet., mostly epic,

properly of persons, among, in company with, μετὰ τριτάτοισιν ἄνασσεν in or among the third generation Nestor reigned, Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
74%with
with74% · 350×after21% · 99×other renderings5% · 24×

473 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial79%predicate18%subject2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 470 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀποκτείνωI put to death, λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, go
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theμήNegκαίand, even, also,
Article the
καίand, even, also,οὐδέNegεἷςone
αὐτός
πατήρfather, Father, ἄγγελοςan angel, messenμέροςa part, portion
ἐγώ
ὁράωI see, look uponπαιδίονa little child, παραδίδωμιI hand over, del
μετάafter470×
what comes after →
Article the
μαθητήςa learner, disciπνεῦμαwind, breath, spτελώνηςa collector of t
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existArticle the
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, existἐνArticle the
οὗτος
ὁράωI see, look uponἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oλέγωI say, speak
σύ
εἰμίI am, existἔτιstill, yet, evenκαινόςfresh, new

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμετά · 470× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Mark Revelation Hebrews 1 Corinthians 1 Timothy 1 John 2 Corinthians Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 930 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 26c. AD 40

χρόνος γὰρ οὐκ ἦν πρὸ κόσμου, ἀλλ’ ἢ σὺν αὐτῷ γέγονεν ἢ μετ’ αὐτόν·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς ὁ κατακλυσμὸς ἐγένετο καὶ ὃν τρόπον Νῶχος σωθεὶς ἐν λάρνακι μετὰ τῶν συγγενῶν κατῴκησεν ἐν τῷ Σινάρῳ πεδίῳ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD

τῶν συνκυρόντων πάντων ὧν κεκράτηκεν ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν ἐφʼ ὅσον περιῆι χρόνον, ἡμῶν δὲ μετὰ τὴν ἐκείνου τελευτὴν τῶν λοιπῶν κρατουσῶν, Ἀρίστων Ἀθηνοδότου τῶν ἀπὸ Διὸς πόλεως τῆς μεγάλης

P.Grenf. 1 33Thebais104 BC

Ἀράβισσα ὡς ἐτῶν κζ μέση μελίχρως λεύκωμα ὀφθαλμόν, μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύρριν αἱ τρεῖς τῶν Ψεμμίνιος μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ ἑαυτῶν ἀδελφοῦ Παχνούβιος τοῦ προγεγραμμένου καὶ συνπωλουμένου, ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτοῖς πατρικῆς

P.Adl. 20Poinkoris (Diopolites)99 BC

Διοπολίτου ἐπὶ … τοῦ παρὰ … ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο Ὧρος Ἑρμίου ὡς ἐτῶν δέκα δύο μετὰ προσπωλουμένης τῆς Ὥρου συγγενοῦς Ἀρσινόης τῆς Βελλέους ὡς ἐτῶν κβ μέσης μελιχρόου στρογγυλοπροσώπου εὐθύρινος

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
τὸho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASN — Article · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
δειπνῆσαιdeipneō eating G1172 Verb · aorist · active · infinitive
4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To dine means to eat the main meal of the day, usually in the evening, as in Luke 17:8. This verb is used to describe taking the chief meal of the day. It can also be used metaphorically.
Tyndale gloss
to dine
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word δειπνέω (deipneō) means to dine or take the chief meal of the day. It is derived from the noun δεῖπνον and is used in various contexts, including literal meals and metaphorical references in the New Testament, such as in Luke and Revelation. The lexicons indicate a consistent meaning across sources, focusing on the act of dining.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δειπνέω, -ῶ

(< δεῖπνον, q.v.),

[in LXX: Pr 23:1 (לחם), To 7:8 8:1, Da LXX 11:27 * ;]

to take the chief meal of the day, to dine, to sup: Lk 17:8 22:20 (WH, br., R, mg. omits), I Co 11:25; metaph., Re 3:20.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δειπνέω, -@: [fut. δειπνήσω}; 1 aor. ἐδείπνησα; (δεῖmvov); to sup: Lk. xvii. 8; xxii. 20 [WI reject the whole pass., see their App.]; 1 Co. xi. 25; in an allegory, δειπνήσω per αὐτοῦ, I will make him to share in my most intimate and blissful intercourse: Rev. iii. 20.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δειπνέω. Interesting examples of the word occur in invitations to dinner or to a wedding-feast, e.g. P Oxy I. 110 (ii/A.D.) ἐρωτᾷ σε Χαιρήμων δειπνῆσαι eis κλείνην τοῦ κυρίου Σαράπιδος ἐν τῷ Σαραπείῳ αὔριον, ἥτις ἐστὶν τε, ἀπὸ ὥρας 8, **Chaeremon requests your company at dinner at the table of the lord Sarapis in the Serapeum to-morrow, the 15th, at 9 o'clock”: similarly 7b. 111 (iti/A.p.), III. 523 (1i/A.D.), VI. 926 (iii/A.pD.), P Fay 132 (iii/A.p.). The hour, which corresponds to our 3 p.m., illustrates the elasticity of a term which will answer to our ‘* lunch” or ** supper ”’ on occasion : it relieves some of the difficulty in Lk 1416, where an ἄριστον seems demanded by the details. In P Oxy VI. 927 (iii/A.D.) we have the same formula and the same hour, but els γάμους stands in the place of δειπνῆσαι. It is curious to find our phrase ‘‘ to dine out”’ paralleled —BGU IV. 1141°° (c.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δειπνέω (deipneō) — to dine.

δειπν-έω,

future -ήσω[Refs 5th c.BC+], -ήσομαι [Refs 1st c.BC+]aorist ἐδείπνησα, Epic dialect δείπνησα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect δεδείπνηκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Attic dialect 1st pers. plural δεδείπναμεν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; infinitive δεδειπνάναι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: pluperfect ἐδεδειπνήκεσαν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect δεδειπνήκειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—make a meal, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: in Attic dialect always, take the chief meal, dine, once in Trag., δειπνεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δ. τὸ ἄριστον make breakfast serve as dinner, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δ. παρά τινι with one, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [ἐν πρυτανείῳ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δειπνέω

deipneo

from 1173; to dine, i.e. take the principle (or evening) meal:--sup (X

-er).

see GREEK for 1173

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δειπνέω

v.

I dine

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δειπνέω deipneō 4x

to eat or dine, Lk. 17:8; 22:20; 1 Cor. 11:25; Rev. 3:20

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δειπνέω to make a meal, Hom.: in attic to take the chief meal, to dine, δ. τὸ ἄριστον to make breakfast serve as dinner, Xen.

c. acc., δ. ἄρτον to make a meal on bread, Hes.; also, δ. ἀπό τινος Ar.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAN — Verb · aorist · active · infinitive
aorist active infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5658

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Eating

The ancient Hebrews would not eat with the Egyptians (Gen. 43:32). In the time of our Lord they would not eat with Samaritans (John 4:9), and were astonished that he ate with publicans and sinners (Matt. 9:11). The Hebrews originally sat at table, but afterwards adopted the Persian and Chaldean practice of reclining (Luke 7:36-50). Their principal meal was at noon (Gen. 43:16; 1 Kings 20:16; Ruth 2:14; Luke 14:12). The word “eat” is used metaphorically…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The Jews would have considered themselves polluted by eating with people of another religion, or with any who were ceremonially unclean or disreputable-as with Samaritans, Joh 4:9, publicans, Mt 9:11, or Gentiles, Ac 10:28 Ga 2:12. Eating together was an established token of mutual confidence and friendship, a pledge of friendly relations between families, which their children were expected to perpetuate. The rites of hospitality were held sacred; and to this day, among the Arabs, a fugitive is safe for the time, if he gains the shelter of even an enemy’s tent. The abuse of hospitality was a great crime, Ps 41:9.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ The host acting as waiter Ge 18:8

→ Favored guests served a double portion Ge 43:34

→ Table used in Jud 1:7

→ Sitting at table Ex 32:6

→ Reclining on couches Am 6:4,7; Lu 7:37,38; Joh 13:25

→ Ablutions before Mt 15:2

→ See FEASTS

→ See FOOD

→ See GLUTTONY

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%having supped
having supped25% · 1×i will dine25% · 1×i may eat25% · 1×eating25% · 1×

4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
μετά
τίςIrg
ἑτοιμάζωI make ready, pr
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτός
δειπνέωeating
what comes after →
λέγωI say, speak
οὗτος
καίand, even, also, nam
περιζώννυμιI gird round
μετά
αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδειπνέω · 4× in the New Testament
Luke 1 Corinthians Revelation
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 8.234c. AD 75–95

καὶ ὁ μὲν ἱκέτευσε τὸν θεὸν τοῦτʼ αὐτῷ παρασχεῖν, ὁ δὲ τῆς χειρὸς τὸ κατὰ φύσιν ἀπολαβούσης χαίρων ἐπʼ αὐτῇ τὸν προφήτην παρεκάλει δειπνῆσαι παρʼ αὐτῷ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD
CdÉ 41 (1966), p. 347-353Heptakomia (Apollonopolites)AD 114–AD 119

ἐστιν ἀργὰ διὰ τὸ μηδένα προσέρχεσθαι μήτε πρὸς ἐνοίκησιν μήτε τ … ο … δειπνῆσαι α … α ἀλλʼ οὐ προσευκαιρῶ αὐτοῖς. παρακαλῶ οὖν σε γράψαι Ἡρακλείῳ ὅπως παραλάβῃ

P.Oxy. 31 2592Oxyrhynchites (?)AD 76–AD 200

ἐρωτᾷ σε Νεῖλος δειπνῆσαι εἰς κλίνην τοῦ κυρίου Σαράπιδος ἐν τῶι Σαραπείῳ τῇ ι ἀπὸ ὥρας θ

P.Oxy. 52 3693OxyrhynchosAD 101–AD 200

ἐρωτᾷ σε Ἑρμεῖνος δειπνῆσαι εἰς κλίνην τοῦ κυρίου Σαράπιδος ἐν τῷ Σαραπείῳ αὔριον ἥτις ἐστὶν τριακὰς ἀπὸ ὥρας

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
λέγων·legō saying; G3004 Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
2,255× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to say or speak, and it is used by Jesus and others in the New Testament to share teachings and tell stories. It appears in Matthew 9:34 and John 1:29.
Tyndale gloss
to say
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

λέγω (legō) is a primary Greek verb meaning 'to say' or 'to speak.' It encompasses a range of uses, including expressing thoughts, making declarations, and narrating events. The New Testament frequently employs it in direct speech and as a way to convey meaning, such as in Matthew 27:11. Abbott-Smith notes its distinction from similar verbs like λαλέω.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — λαλέω, λέγω, λαλιά, λόγος from a scan

In dealing with synonyms of the N. T. we plainly need not concern ourselves with such earlier, or even contemporary, uses of the words which we are discriminating, as lie altogether outside of the N. T. sphere, when these uses do not illustrate, and have not affected, their Scriptural employment. It follows from this that all those contemptuous uses of λαλεῖν as to talk at random, as one ἀθυρόστομος, or with no door to his lips, might do; of λαλιά, as chatter («Kpacia λόγου ἄλογος, Plato, Defin. 416)—for I cannot believe that we are to find this at John iv. 42—may be dismissed and set aside. The antithesis in the line of Eupolis (Meineke, /ragm. Com. Gr. p. 174), Λαλεῖν ἄριστος, ἀδυνατώτατος λέγειν, does little or nothing to illustrate the matter in hand. The distinction which indeed exists between the words may in this way be made clear. There are two leading aspects under which speech…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λέγω,

[in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Ge 22:16, al.;]

in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount.

In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Ac 13:15 24:10; seq. orat. dir., Mt 9:34, Mk 3:11, Jo 1:29, al.; seq. ὅτι recit., Mk 3:21, Lk 1:24, Jo 6:14, al.; acc. et. inf., Lk 11:18, Jo 12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mt 11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λέγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἔλεγαν, Jn. xi. 56 Tdf. [ef. ἔχω, init.]): I. in its earliest use in Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; οἵ. J. G. Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius § 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect, gather; to pick out. 2. lo lay with, count with; to enumerate, recount, narrate, describe; [οἷ. Eng. tale, Germ. ztihlen). II. to put word to word in speaking, join words together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. λαλεῖν, see under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in 1]. 2, 222 [yet ef. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48, 2; L. and S. s. vy. B. II. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com. use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for 728; often also for D8} (saying, dictum); very rarely for 1393; and soin N.T. 1. univ. a. absol. to…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λέγω. (1). “‘I say, speak”: see e.g. P Par 47 {= Selections, Ῥ- 21 ff.), ¢. B.C. 153, which is addressed on the verso—mpds τοὺς τὴν ἀλήθεαν λέγοντες (—-as), P Fay 12378 (c. A.D. 100) γνώσομαι yap εἰ ἀληθῶς λέγι, “1 will find out whether he is speaking the truth,” P Ryl 11. 7615 (late li/A.D.) ἃ καὶ ἀναγνώσομαι λεγομένου τοῦ [π]ράγματος, “1 will read them when the case is argued” (Edd.), P Flor II. 1327 (A.D. 257) ἔλεζξ]αν πεποιηκέναι ταῦτα ἀγνοίᾳ, ‘they said they had done this in ignorance,” and the magical P Par 5741238 (iii/A.D.) (= Selectzons, p. 113) λόγος λεγόμενος ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, ‘ invocation to be uttered over the head (of the possessed one).”” For the phrase τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν, cf. I Cor 11°, Weiss (Meyer 15 ad 1) cites a sepulchral inscr. of husband and wife from Rhodes, /J/Ae 149 (ii/B.c.) ταὐτὰ λέγοντες ταὐτὰ φρονοῦντες ἤλθομεν τὰν ἀμέτρητον ὁδὸν εἰς ᾿Αἴδαν. (2). Closely…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λέγω (legō) — to say.

λέγω,

__B pick up, etc.: tenses for signification 1 and 11, future λέξω [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist ἔλεξα [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle, future in passive sense λέξομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐλεξάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect ἐλέγμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—passive, aorist ἐλέχθην [Refs 8th c.BC+]-; post-[Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect εἴλοχα (κατ-, συν-), passive εἴλεγμαι, in these senses rarely λέλεγμαι (see. the compounds); also future λεγήσομαι (συλ-): aorist 2 ἐλέγην (κατ-, συν-):—gather, pick up, ὀστέα.. λέγωμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αἱμασιάς τε λέγων picking out stones for building walls, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—middle, gather for oneself, ἐπὶ δὲ ξύλα πολλὰ λέγεσθε [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

λέγω

lego

a primary verb; properly, to "lay" forth, i.e. (figuratively) relate

(in words (usually of systematic or set discourse; whereas 2036 and

5346 generally refer to an individual expression or speech

respectively; while 4483 is properly to break silence merely, and 2980

means an extended or random harangue)); by implication, to mean:--ask,

bid, boast, call, describe, give out, name, put forth, say(-ing, on),

shew, speak, tell, utter.

see GREEK for 2036

see GREEK for 5346

see GREEK for 4483

see GREEK for 2980

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λέγω

v.

I say, speak

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λέγω legō 2x

to lay, to arrange, to gather; to say, Mt. 1:20; to speak, make an address or speech, Acts 26:1; to say mentally, in thought, Mt. 3:9; Lk. 3:8; to say in written language, Mk. 15:28; Lk. 1:63; Jn. 19:37; to say, as distinguished from acting, Mt. 23:3; to mention, speak of, Mk. 14:71; Lk. 9:31; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-NSM — Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
35%saying
saying35% · 480×says13% · 175×i say12% · 164×he says9% · 122×say5% · 70×he was saying3% · 42×they say2% · 31×other renderings17% · 225×other renderings4% · 48×

1,357 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 107 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb98%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,255 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
αὐτός
πρόςμαθητήςa learner, disciἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theοὗτοςἐγώ
ἸησοῦςJesus
Article theδέbut, on the otheγόνυa knee
ἀμήνHebr
ἀμήνHebrαὐτόςλέγωI say, speak
λέγωsaying;2255×
what comes after →
αὐτός
Article theτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
Article the
μαθητήςa learner, disciἸησοῦςJesusΠέτροςPeter
σύ
ὅτιthat, since, becοὐNegἐάνCond
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theπρόςαὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theοὗτοςσύ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceλέγω · 2,255× in the New Testament
Luke John Matthew Mark Acts Revelation Hebrews Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians James Galatians

76 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,290 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.4c. AD 100

πεφανέρωκεν γὰρ ἡμῖν διὰ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, ὅτι οὕτε θυσιῶν οὔτε ὁλοκαυτωμάτων οὔτε προσφορῶν χρῄζει, λέγων ὅτε μέν:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῷ μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων ,

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἑτερᾶς· νότου γῆ Τακοίμιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Χενσθώτου, ἀπηλιώτου Ἀείους, λιβὸς περίχωμα, τῆς δʼ ἄλλης λεγομένης Πκρώ· νότου γῆ Σενπελαίας, βορρᾶ γῆ Πανᾶτος ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς Ἀραμείους, ἢ οἳ ἂν

P.Adl. 16Pathyris100 BC

οἱ Φίβιος τοῦ Πανεχάτου υἱοί, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου, ἄλλης λεγομένης Φαμούνιος νότου γῆ Παθώτου τοῦ Πατοῦτος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πατσεοῦτος τοῦ Φίβιος, ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
τοῦτοohutos This G3778 Demonstrative pronoun · nominative · singular · neuter
1,388× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This refers to a specific person or thing, like when Jesus says 'this is my body' in Matthew 26:26 and Mark 14:22.
Tyndale gloss
this/he/she/it
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word οὗτος (i.e., *houtos*) is a demonstrative pronoun meaning 'this' or 'this one.' It is used to refer to something nearby or recently mentioned, often with a connotation of contempt in certain contexts. In the New Testament, it appears in various forms, such as in Matthew 3:17 and John 1:15, and can also serve to emphasize or clarify a subject.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, gen., τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου,

[in LXX chiefly for זֶה, זֹאת;]

demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille),

this;

as subst., this one, he;

absol.: Mt 3:17, Mk 9:7, Lk 7:44, 45, Jo 1:15, Ac 2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mt 13:55, 56, Mk 6:2, 3, Jo 6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mk 1:38, Ro 14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jo 5:1), Jo 2:12 11:7, al.;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, demonstrative pron. [ef. Curtius p. 543], Hebr. 71, ΠΝ, this; used I. absolutely. 1. a. this one, visibly present here: Mt. iii. 17; xvii.5; Mk. ix. 7; Lk. vii. 44 sq.; ix. 35; 2 Pet.i.17. Mt.ix.3; xxi. 38; Mk. xiv. 69; Lk. 11. 34; xxiii. 2; Jn. i. 15, 30; vii. 25; ix. 8 54. 19; xviii. 21,50; xxi. 21; Actsii. 15; iv. 10; ix. 21; according to the nature and character of the person or thing mentioned, it is used with a suggestion —either of contempt, as Mt. xiii. 55 sq.; Mk. vi. 2 sq.: Lk. v. 21; vii. 39,49; Jn. vi. 42,52; vii. 15; or of admiration, Mt. xxi. 11; Actsix.21; οἵ, Wahl, Clavis apocryphor. V. T. p- 370% b. it refers to a subject immediately preceding, the one just named: Lk. i. 32; ii. 37 [RGL]; Jn. i. 2; vi. 71; 2 Tim. iii. 6,8, ete.; at the beginning of a narrative about one already mentioned, Mt. iii. 3; Lk. xvi. 1; Jn. i. 41 (42); ili. 2; xii. 21; xxi.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

οὗτος. A few of the prepositional phrases with this common demonstrative pron. may be illustrated διὰ τοῦτο, ‘on this account,” cf. P Ryl IT. 845 (a.p. 146) τὴν ἄνεσιν τὴν διὰ τοῦτο γενομένην τῶν ὑπαρχόντων, “the ensuing remission “ OUT@S, O’.TO@ of the lands’ (Edd.): ἐκ τούτου, ‘for this reason,’’ Jn 6° cf. 26. 81°4 (c, A.D, 104) ἐκ τούτου δὲ [φανεῖρόν ἐστιν [καὶ] μηδένα χρῇζειν, “‘it is evident from this that nobody wants it’’ (Edd.), BGU 11. 423!7 (ason to his father—ii/a.D.) (= Selections, p. 91) με ἐπαίδευσας καλῶς, Kal ἐκ τούτου ἐλπίζω ταχὺ προκόσί-- par τῶν θε[ῶ]ν θελόντων, “you have brought me up well, and for this reason I hope to be quickly promoted, if the gods will”: τούτου ἕνεκα, ‘‘ for this purpose,” cf. P Oxy I. 1138 (ii/a.p.) ἐὰν δ᾽ dpa μή, ; ἅμα τῷ vide μου ἐξέρχομαι τούτου ἕνεκα, “otherwise I and my son will come for this purpose’’ (Edd.): ἐπὶ τούτων, ““upon this,” ‘in…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

οὗτος (ohutos) — this/he/she/it.

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο,

genitive τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, etc.: the dual feminine never in Attic dialect, see ὁ, ἡ, τό, [near the start]:—demonstrative pronoun, this, common from [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A ORIGIN and FORMS: οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο probably arose from a reduplication of the demonstrative ὁ, ἡ, τό with insertion of -υ- (= Sanskrit Particle u), e.g. ταῦτα from τα-υ-τα: Doric dialect genitive singular feminine τούτας [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc., the latter is uncertain in [Refs 5th c.BC+], as genitive singular neuter οὕτω [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; accusative singular feminine οὕταν [Refs 6th c.BC+] —In _Attic dialect_ οὗτος was frequently strengthened by the _demonstrative_ -ί, οὑτοσί, αὑτηί, τουτί, _genitive_ τουτουί, _dative_ τουτῳί, _accusative_ τουτονί; plural nominative οὑτοιί, neuter ταυτί, etc., this man here…

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο

Dem.pr.

this, he, she, it

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

οὗτος houtos 1x

this, this person or thing, Mt. 3:3, 9, 17; 8:9; 10:2; 24:34, et al. freq.; used by way of contempt, this fellow, Mt. 13:55; 27:47; αὐτὸ τοῦτο, this very thing, this same thing, 2 Cor. 2:3; 7:11; εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο, and elliptically, αὐτὸ τοῦτο, for this same purpose, on this account, Eph. 6:18, 22; 2 Pet. 1:5; καὶ οὗτος, and moreover, Lk. 7:12; 16:1; 20:30; καὶ τοῦτο, and that too, 1 Cor. 6:6, 8; tοῦτο μὲν ... τοῦτο δέ, partly ... partly, Heb.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

οὗτος demonstr. Pron. this, Lat. hic, to designate the nearer of two things, opp. to ἐκεῖνος, the more remote (cf. ὅδε), Hom., etc.

when, of two things, one precedes and the other follows, ὅδε generally refers to what follows, οὗτος to what precedes, Soph., etc.

so also, οὗτος is used emphat., generally in contempt, while ἐκεῖνος (like Lat. ille) denotes praise, ὁ πάντ᾽ ἄναλκις οὗτος, i. e. Aegisthus, id. Soph.; οὗτος ἀνήρ Plat.; τούτους τοὺς συκοφάντας id. Plat.

in attic law-language, οὗτος is commonly applied to the opponent, whether plaintiff or defendant, whereas in Lat. hic was the client, iste the opponent, Dem.

often much like an adv., in local sense (cf. ὅδε init.), τίς δ᾽ οὗτος κατὰ νῆας ἔρχεαι; who art thou here that comest . . ? Il.; often in attic, τίς οὑτοσί; who's this…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Dem-NSN — Demonstrative pronoun · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

D-NSN Part of Speech: Demonstrative pronoun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
55%this
this55% · 781×these things16% · 231×these14% · 196×he3% · 49×other renderings5% · 73×other renderings7% · 94×

1,424 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 49 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject36%object32%adverbial26%predicate4%indirect object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,388 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςδέbut, on the otheλέγωI say, speak
διά
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςεἰμίI am, exist
ἐν
καίand, even, also,γάρforοὔτεNeg
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakεἰςγάρfor
ὅτιthat, since, because
λέγωI say, speakοἶδαI know, rememberγράφωI write
οὗτοςThis1388×
what comes after →
Article the
λόγοςa word, speech, θεόςGod, a godἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ὅς
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theκατακρίνωI condemnεἰμίI am, exist
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakεἰμίI am, existαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
σύArticle theαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοὗτος · 1,388× in the New Testament
John Acts Luke Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 John 2 Peter

29 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 2,054 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ἀλλ’ ὅ γε μέγας Μωυσῆς ἀλλοτριώτατον τοῦ ὁρατοῦ νομίσας εἶναι τὸ ἀγένητον — πᾶν γὰρ τὸ αἰσθητὸν ἐν γενέσει καὶ μεταβολαῖς οὐδέποτε κατὰ ταὐτὰ ὄν — τῷ μὲν ἀοράτῳ καὶ νοητῷ προσένειμεν ὡς ἀδελφὸν καὶ συγγενὲς ἀιδιότητα, τῷ δ’ αἰσθητῷ γένεσιν οἰκεῖον…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς πύργος, ὃν οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ἐφ' ὕβρει τοῦ θεοῦ ᾠκοδόμησαν, καὶ ὡς τὰς φωνὰς αὐτῶν μετέβαλε καὶ ὁ τόπος, ἐν ᾧ τοῦτο γέγονε, Βαβυλὼν ἐκλήθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν μ χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δύο . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν λ χαλκοῦ δραχμῶν τρισχιλίων . προπωληταὶ καὶ βεβαιωταὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Νεχούτης καὶ ὁ σὺν αὐτῷ οἱ ἀποδόμενοι, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

εὐθύριν χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας καὶ διακοσίας . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πανοβχοῦνις ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Εὔνους ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
τὸho <the> G3588 Article · nominative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSN — Article · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
ποτήριονpotērion cup [is] G4221 Noun · nominative · singular · neuter
31× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A cup is a drinking vessel, like the one Jesus used at the Last Supper in Matthew 26:27. It can also mean the contents of the cup or a person's fate. In 1 Corinthians 11:25, it refers to the cup of blessing.
Amplified meaning
the contents of which represent my blood
Tyndale gloss
cup
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ποτήριον (poterion) means a drinking cup or wine cup, derived from ποτήρ (potēr). It is used in the New Testament to refer to both the physical vessel and its contents, often in a metaphorical sense related to divine experiences, such as suffering or blessings. The word appears in various contexts, including the Eucharist and references to God's providence.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ποτήριον, -ου, τό, dimin. of ποτήρ

(< πίνω),

[in LXX chiefly for כּוֹס;]

a wine cup: Mt 23:25, 26 26:27, Mk 7:4 14:23, Lk 11:39 22:17, 20a (WH, R, mg., om.), I Co 11:25, Re 17:4; πίνειν ἐκ τοῦ π., I Co 11:28; c. gen. rei, Mt 10:42, Mk 9:41; τ. εὐλογίας, I Co 10:16; by meton., of the contents of the cup, Lk 22:20b (WH, R, mg., om.), I Co 11:25, 26; c. gen. pers., I Co 10:21 11:27.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ποτήριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of ποτήρ), a cup, a drinking vessel; a. prop.: Mt. xxiii. 25 sq.; xxvi. 27; Mk. vi. 4, 8 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; xiv. 23; Lk. xi. 39; xxii. 17, 20; 1 Co. xi. 25; Rev. xvii. 4; πίνειν ἐκ τοῦ ποτηρίου, 1 Co. xi. 28; τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας (see εὐλογία, 4), 1 Co. x. 16; with agen. of the thing with which the cup is filled: ψυχροῦ, Mt. x. 42; ὕδατος, Mk. ix. 41; by meton. of the container for the contained, the contents of the cup, what is offered to be drunk, Lk. xxii. 20

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ποτήριον. P Tebt I. 657 (B.c. 140-139) φιάλας καὶ ποτήρια, ‘bowls and cups,” P Ryl 11. 127%! (A.D. 29) ποτήρια κασσιδί(έρινα) B, “2 drinking-cups of tin,” P Fay 12712 (ii/iii a.p.) pikdv ποτήριν Θεονᾶτι τῷ pK (k>®@ (a Doric form: Thumb e//en. p. 60), ‘‘a little cup for little Theonas,” and from the inscrr. Sy// 226 (=%495)'4 (c. B.C. 230) τὰ ἱερὰ ποτήρια. The word is fully illustrated in S4J7 iii. p- 142 ff. With Mt 23*°# we may compare ποτηροπλύτης, ** washer of cups’’ in Os¢r 1218° (Rom.).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ποτήριον (potērion) — cup.

ποτήριον, τό,

drinking-cup, wine-cup, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; οὔποτ᾽ ἐκ ταὐτοῦ μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν πίεται π.[Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. the Cup in the Eucharist, [NT]

3. jar, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

4. receptacle for offerings in temples, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

II. absorbent preparation, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

III. see at {ποτίρριον}.

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ποτήριον

poterion

neuter of a derivative of the alternate of 4095; a drinking-vessel; by

extension, the contents thereof, i.e. a cupful (draught);

figuratively, a lot or fate:--cup.

see GREEK for 4095

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ποτήριον, ου, τό

n.n.

a drinking cup

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ποτήριον potērion 31x

a vessel for drinking, cup, Mt. 10:42; 23:25, 26; meton. the contents of a cup, liquor contained in a cup, Lk. 22:20; 1 Cor. 10:16; from the Hebrew, the cup or potion of what God’s administration deals out, Mt. 20:22, 23; Rev. 14:10

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ποτήριον ποτήριον, ου, τό, ΠΟ, Root of some tenses of πίνω a drinking-cup, wine-cup, Hdt., attic

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSN — Noun · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

(Most frequently, koc; four other words in one passage each; poterion): A vessel for drinking from, of a variety of material (gold, silver, earthenware), patterns (Es 1:7) and elaboration.

Figurative: By ordinary figure of speech, put sometimes for the contents of the cup, namely, for that which is drunk (Mt 26:39). In both Old Testament and New Testament applied figuratively to that which is portioned out, and of which one is to partake; most frequently used of what is sorrowful, as God's judgments, His wrath, afflictions, etc. (Ps 11:6; 75:8; Isa 51:17; Re 14:10). In a similar sense, used by Christ concerning the…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Cup

A wine-cup (Gen. 40:11, 21), various forms of which are found on Assyrian and Egyptian monuments. All Solomon’s drinking vessels were of gold (1 Kings 10: 21). The cups mentioned in the New Testament were made after Roman and Greek models, and were sometimes of gold (Rev. 17:4).

The art of divining by means of a cup was practiced in Egypt (Gen. 44:2-17), and in the East generally.

The “cup of salvation” (Ps. 116:13) is the cup of thanksgiving for the great salvation. The “cup of consolation” (Jer. 16:7) refers to the custom of friends sending viands and wine to console relatives in mourning (

The cups of the Jews, whether of metal or earthenware, were possibly borrowed, in point of shape and design, from Egypt and from the Phoenicians, who were celebrated in that branch of workmanship. Egyptian cups were of various shapes, either with handles or without them. In Solomon’s time all his drinking vessels were of gold, none of silver. (1 Kings 10:21) Babylon is compared to a golden cup. (Jeremiah 51:7) The great laver, or "sea," was made with a rim like the rim of a cup (cos), with flowers of lilies," (1 Kings 7:26) a form which the Persepolitan cups resemble. The cups of the New Testament were often no doubt formed on Greek and Roman models. They were sometimes of gold. (

This word is taken in Scripture both in a proper and in a figurative sense. In a proper sense, it signifies a common cup, of horn, or some precious metal, Ge 40:13 44:2 1Ki 7:26, such as is used for drinking out of at meals; or a cup of ceremony, used at solemn and religious meals-as at the Passover, when the father of the family pronounced certain blessings over the cup, and having tasted it, passed it round to the company and his whole family, who partook of it, 1Co 10:16. In a figurative sense, a cup is spoken of as filled with the portion given to one by divine providence, Ps 11:6 16:5; with the blessings of life and of grace,

Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 26 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Josephus The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaOn Dreams 2.159c. AD 40

καὶ ἔλαβον τὴν σταφυλὴν καὶ ἐξέθλιψα αὐτὴν εἰς τὸ ποτήριον, καὶ ἔδωκα τὸ ποτήριον εἰς τὰς χεῖρας Φαραώ“ (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 8.48c. AD 75–95

βουλόμενος δὲ πεῖσαι καὶ παραστῆσαι τοῖς παρατυγχάνουσιν ὁ Ἐλεάζαρος, ὅτι ταύτην ἔχει τὴν ἰσχύν, ἐτίθει μικρὸν ἔμπροσθεν ἤτοι ποτήριον πλῆρες ὕδατος ἢ ποδόνιπτρον καὶ τῷ δαιμονίῳ προσέταττεν ἐξιὸν τἀνθρώπου ταῦτα ἀνατρέψαι καὶ παρασχεῖν ἐπιγνῶναι…

The DidacheThe Didache 9.2c. AD 100

πρῶτον περὶ τοῦ ποτηρίου: Εὐχαριστοῦμέν σοι, πάτερ ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ τῆς ἁγίας ἀμπέλου Δαυεὶδ τοῦ παιδός σου, ἦς ἐγνώρισας ἡμῖν διὰ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ παιδός σου: σοὶ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD 1st c. BC 3rd c. BC
BGU 16 2671Herakleopolites22 BC–AD 5

λόγος δαπάνης κοινῆς ὑποκειμένων Τρύ … φωνι ὡς εἰς βιβλιοθήκην διʼ Ἀντιγόνωι δραχμὰς φ ποτηρίων καὶ ἡμικυτυλῶν δραχμὰς τμ … ουθδα δραχμὰς ξγ … Ἀλεξάνδρη παιδα῾ρί ?̓ Ἀπελλᾷ σ

P.Ryl. 2 136Euhemeria (ArsinoitesAD 34

ἀπὸ Εὐημερίας τῆς Θεμίστου μερίδος ὑπὲρ ὧν ἤροσάν μου ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας λῃστρικῷ τρόπωι ποτηρίων κασσιτερίνων καὶ κελλίβατος καὶ ἄλλων σκευῶν καὶ ἀργυρίου δραχμῶν ξ ὕβριν μοι συνεστήσατο οὐ

P.Oxy. 10 1269OxyrhynchosAD 101–AD 125

τοῦ Θέωνος μετὰ τὴν τελευτὴν τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ Ἰσᾶτος δραχμῶν τεσσαράκοντα , μεγάλην κίστην χαλκοῦν, ποτήριον κασσιτέρινον ἓν καὶ ἀργυρίου ἓν , κερβικάριον … νον

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
ho the G3588 Article · nominative · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSF — Article · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
καινὴkainos new G2537 Adjective · nominative · singular · feminine
42× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means new or fresh, like something that has not been used before. It is used in Matthew 9 and 2 Corinthians 5 to describe a new heart or a new creation.
Amplified meaning
fresh, recently established
Tyndale gloss
new
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καινός (kainos) means new or fresh, often in terms of quality rather than age. It contrasts with παλαιός (palaios), which means old or antiquated. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like new wine (Mt 9:17) and the new covenant (Lk 22:20). The lexicons note a distinction between καινός and νέος (neos), with the former emphasizing freshness and the latter focusing on recentness.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — νέος, καινός from a scan

Some have denied that any difference can in the N. T. be traced between these words. They derive a certain plausible support for this denial from the fact that manifestly νέος and καινός, both rendered ‘new’ in our Version, are often interchangeably used; thus νέος ἄνθρωπος (Col. iii. 10), and καινὸς ἄνθρωπος (Eph. ii. 15), in both cases “ the 1 Our English ‘ world,’ etymologically regarded, more nearly represents αἰών than κόσμος. The old ‘ weralt’ (in modern German ‘ welt’) is composed of two words, ‘wer,’ man, and ‘alt,’ age or generation. The ground-meaning, therefore, of ‘weralt’ is generation of men (Pott. Etym. Forsch. vol. ii, pt. i. p. 125). Out of this expression of time unfolds itself that of space, as αἰών passed into the meaning of κόσμος (Grimm, Deutsche Myth. p. 752); but in the earliest German records ‘ weralt’ is used, first as an expression of time, and only…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καινός, -ή, -όν,

[in LXX (Ez 11:19, al.) for חָדָשׁ, exc. Is 65:15 (אַחֵר);]

of that which is unused or unaccustomed, new in respect to form or quality, fresh, unused, novel: opp. to παλαιός, ἀρχαῖος, Mt 9:17 13:52, Mk 2:21, 22, Lk 5:36, 38, II Co 5:17, Eph 4:24; πλήρωμα, Mk 2:21; μνημεῖον, Mt 27:60, Jo 19:41; διαθήκη (T, WH, R, txt., omit), Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καινός, -7, -ov; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; Sept. for wan; new, i. e. a. as respects form; recenily made, fresh, recent, unused, unworn (opp. to παλαιός old, antiquated) : as ἀσκός, Mt. ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22 (Tom. Tr WH br. the cl.]; Lk. v. 88 ; ἱμάτιον, Lk. v. 36; πλήρωμα, Mk. ii. 21; μνημεῖον, Mt. xxvii. 60; with ἐν ᾧ οὐδέπω οὐδεὶς ἐτέθη added, Jn. xix. 413; καινὰ x. παλαιά, Mt. xiii. 52; new, which as recently made is superior to what it succeeds: διαθήκη, Mt. xxvi. 28 (Τ᾿ WH om. caw.) ; Mk. xiv. 24 RL; Lk. xxii. 20 (WH reject the pass.) ; 1 Co. xi. 25; 2Co. iii. 6; Heb. viii. 8,13; ix. 15, (Jer. xxxviil. (xxxi.) 31); καινοὶ οὐρανοί, καινὴ γῆ, 2 Pet. iii. 13; Rev. xxi. 1, (Is. xv. 17 ; xvi. 22) ; Ἱερουσαλήμ (see Ἱεροσόλυμα, fin.), Rey. iii. 12; xxi. 2; ἄνθρωπος (see the word, 1 f.), Eph. ii. 15; iv. 24, (καρδία, πνεῦμα, Ezek. xviii. 31; xxxvi. 26) ; καινὰ πάντα ποιῶ. I bring all…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καινός (kainos) — new.

καινός, ή, όν,

new, fresh, ἔργα οὔτ᾽ ὦν κ. οὔτε παλαιά [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. λόγους φέρειν to bring news, [Refs]; τίδ᾽ ἐστὶ κ.; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἢ βούλεσθε περιιόντες πυνθάνεσθαι, “λέγεταί τι κ.;” [Refs 4th c.BC+] anew, afresh, [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc. (also ἐκ καινοῦ [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; especially of new dramas, τραγῳδῶν γιγνομένων καινῶν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; briefly τραγῳδοῖς κ. at the representation of the new tragedies, Docum. cited in [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but κ. κωμῳδία, τραγῳδία, of a new style of drama, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. newly-made, κύλικες, τριήρης, ὀθόνια, οἶνος, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

3. adverb -νῶς newly, afresh, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καινός

kainos

of uncertain affinity; new (especially in freshness; while 3501 is

properly so with respect to age:--new.

see GREEK for 3501

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καινός, ή, όν

Adj

fresh, new

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καινός kainos 41x

new, recently made, Mt. 9:17; Mk. 2:22; new in species, character, or mode, Mt. 26:28, 29; Mk. 14:24, 25; Lk. 22:20; Jn. 13:34; 2 Cor. 5:17; Gal. 6:15; Eph. 2:15; 4:24; 1 Jn. 2:7; Rev. 3:12; novel, strange, Mk. 1:27; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

καινός καινός, new, fresh, Lat. recens, novus, καινὰ καὶ παλαιὰ ἔργα Hdt.; καινοὺς λόγους φέρειν to bring news, Aesch.; λέγεταί τι καινόν; Dem.; ἐκ καινῆς (sc. ἀρχῆς) anew, afresh, Lat. de novo, Thuc.:—esp. of dramas produced for the first time, Aeschin., Dem.

newly-invented, new-fangled, novel, Eur., etc.; κ. θεοί strange gods, Plat.; καινά innovations, Xen.; οὐδὲν καινότερον εἰσέφερε τῶν ἄλλων he introduced as little of anything new as others, id. Xen.; τὸ καινὸν τοῦ πολέμου the unforeseen turn which war often takes, Thuc.

κ. ἄνθρωπος = novus homo, Plut.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NSF — Adjective · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NSF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
86%new
new86% · 38×a new7% · 3×anew5% · 2×fresh2% · 1×

44 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object45%adverbial21%subject17%predicate12%second object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 42 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ποτήριονa drinking cupἐγώἐν
ἀσκόςa wine-skin
εἰς
ἐντολήan ordinance, injunc
οὐNegπάλινagain, further,
σύ
μετάγράφωI write
διαθήκηa covenant, will, te
ἸούδαςJudah, Judas, Juοὗτος
καινόςnew42×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀμφότεροιboth of twoπαλαιόςold, ancient, woγῆthe earth, soil,
ἐν
Article theὅς
διαθήκηa covenant, will, te
ἐνεἰμίI am, existοὐNeg
γράφωI write
σύὅς
κατά
ἐξουσίαpower, authorityArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαινός · 42× in the New Testament
Revelation Luke Mark Matthew 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 John 2 Peter Acts Ephesians John 1 Corinthians
Across the New Testament14 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 28 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn Husbandry 148c. AD 40

„τίς ὁ ἄνθρωπος ὁ οἰκοδομήσας οἰκίαν καινὴν καὶ οὐκ ἐνεκαίνισεν αὐτήν;

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.79c. AD 75–95

Λαμέχου γάρ ἐστιν υἱός, οὗ πατὴρ ἦν Μαθουσάλας, οὗτος δὲ ἦν τοῦ Ἀνώχου τοῦ Ἰαρέδου, Μαλαήλου δὲ Ἰάρεδος ἐγεγόνει, ὃς ἐκ Καϊνᾶ τεκνοῦται τοῦ Ἀνώσου σὺν ἀδελφαῖς πλείοσιν, Ἄνωσος δὲ Σήθου υἱὸς ἦν τοῦ Ἀδάμου·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.6c. AD 100

ταῦτα οὖν κατήργησεν, ἵνα ὁ καινὸς νόμος τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἄνευ ζυγοῦ ἀνάγκης ὤν, μὴ ἀνθρωποποίητον ἔχῃ τὴν προσφοράν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Fay. 121Euhemeria (Arsinoites)AD 110

Σαβῖνος Γεμείνωι τῶι ἰδίωι χαίρειν. εὖ ποιήσεις δοὺς Οὐηστείνωι εἰς τὸν ζυγὸν αὐτοῦ ζυγόδεσμον καινὸν στερεόν, ὃ καὶ ἀλείψεις ἐπιμελῶς, ἐκ τῶν ἐν τῆι κιβωτῶι τῶν ἀσκῶν ἧι ἔχεις

P.Aberd. 42 hKaranis (Arsinoites)AD 189

τετελώνηται διὰ πύλης Καινῆς ἐρημοφυλακίας Χήρης ἐξάγων ὄνον ἕνα . ἔτους κθ Ἐπεὶφ κα.

P.Bodl. 1 15ArsinoitesAD 176–AD 225

μόνας, γίνονται κριθῆς ἀρτάβαι τμ, ἐξ ὧν ὑπελογήθησαν ὑπὲρ ἑκατοστῆς α 𐅵 διαφόρου μέτρου καινοῦ παρὰ τὸ παλαιὸν κριθῆς ἀρτάβαι πέντε , λοιπὰς καθαρᾶς ἀδόλου ἀβώλου κεκοσκινευμένης κριθῆς ἀρτάβας

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
διαθήκηdiathēkē covenant G1242 Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
33× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Luke than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A covenant is a formal agreement or contract between two parties, like a will or a promise. In the Bible, it often refers to God's promises to his people, as seen in Galatians 3:15 and Hebrews 9:16.
Amplified meaning
a formal agreement, a promise
Tyndale gloss
covenant
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

διαθήκη (diathēkē) refers to a disposition or arrangement, often understood as a will or testament. It also signifies a covenant, particularly in the context of agreements between God and humanity. The term is frequently used in the New Testament, notably in references to the new covenant established through Christ, as seen in passages like Matthew 26:28 and Hebrews 9:16-17.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

διαθήκη, -ης, ἡ

(< διατίθημι),

[freq. in LXX, and nearly always for בְּרִית ;]

as usually in cl., a disposition, testament, will (Plat., al.): Ga 3:15 (R, mg., but v. Lft., in l.), He 9:16, 17 (R, txt.; MM, Exp., xi,; Milligan, NTD, 75; Abbott, Essays, 107; Deiss., LAE, 341; but v. infr.).

As in LXX (for בְּרִית) = cl. συνθήκη, a convention, arrangement, covenant (exc. in the disputed cases mentioned above, always between God and man, "perhaps with the feeling that the δια- compound was more suitable than the συν- for a covenant with God---συνθ. might suggest equal terms," MM, Exp., l.c.): Ga 3:15 (R, txt., but v. supr., and cf. Thayer, s.v.), He 9:16

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

διαθήκη, -ης, 7, (διατίθημι) ; 1. a disposition, arrangement, of any sort, which one wishes to be valid, (Germ. Verordnung, Willensverfiigung): Gal. iii. 15, where under the name of ἃ man’s disposition is meant specifically a testament, so far forth as it is a specimen and example of that disposition [cf. Mey. or Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]; esp. the last disposal which one makes of his earthly possessions after his death, a testament or will (so in Grk. writ. fr. [Arstph.], Plat. lege. 11 p. 922 ¢. sqq. down): Heb. ix. 16 sq. 2. a compact, covenant (Arstph. av. 440), very often in the Seriptures for M3 (Vulg. testamen136 . tum). For the word covenant is used to denote the close relationship which God entered into, first with Noah (Gen. vi. 18; ix. 9 sqq. [ef. Sir. sliv. 18]), then with Abraham, Isaac and Jacob and their posterity (Lev. xxvi. 42 [ef. 2 Mace. i. 2]), but esp. with Abraham (Gen.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

διαθηκη superfluous, P Petr III. 6 (ὁ)15 (c. B.c. 236) τὴ]ν διαθήκην καταλείπω will be about the earliest example: P Grenf I. 177 (c. B.C. 147 or 136) and 76. 214 (B.c. 126) also fall within the LXX period. So do such inserr. as OG/S 3387 (8.6. 133), of the instrument by which King Attalus of Pergamum devised his country to Rome, A/ichel 1001 ἷν- 8 (c. B.C. 200) κατὰ διαθήκαν (the testament of Epicteta, in Theran Doric), and one of iii/B.c. in ᾿Αθηνᾷ xx. p. 167 κατὰ τὰς διαθήκας, Sy 8279 (i/B.c.) might also be cited—houses and gardens bequeathed by a woman to Aphrodite Urania, κατὰ τὰς διαθήκας τὰς κειμένας ἐν τῶι ἱερῶι τῆς ᾿Αφροδίτης καὶ παρ᾽ Εἰὐνομίδει τῶι ἄρχοντι καὶ παρὰ τῶι θεσμοθέτει Κτησιφῶντι. We may also mention BGU IV. 11517 (B.c. 14) καθ᾽ ἣν ἔθετο διαθήκ(ην) διὰ τοῦ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων ἀρχείου, if illustration is needed to show that the Jews used the word in this sense. Cagnat 1V.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

διαθήκη (diathēkē) — covenant.

διαθήκη, ἡ,

(διατίθημι) disposition of property by will, testament, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ διαθήκην by will, [Refs 1st c.BC+], etc.: in plural, διαθήκας διαθέσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. αἱ ἀπόρρητοι δ. mystic deposits on which the common weal depended, probably oracles (compare διαθέτης), [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II.2. name of an eyesalve, because the recipe was deposited in a temple, [Refs 6th c.AD+]

III. compact, covenant, ἢν μὴ διαθῶνται διαθήκην ἐμοί [LXX+5th c.BC+]; καινή, παλαιὰ δ., [NT]; disposition (with allusion to [NT]

IV. ={διάθεσις}[Refs 3rd c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

διαθήκη

diatheke

from 1303; properly, a disposition, i.e. (specially) a contract

(especially a devisory will):--covenant, testament.

see GREEK for 1303

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

διαθήκη, ης, ἡ

n.f.

a covenant, will, testament

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

διαθήκη diathēkē 33x

a testamentary disposition, will; a covenant, Heb. 9:16, 17; Gal. 3:15; in NT, a covenant of God with men, Gal. 3:17; 4:24; Heb. 9:4; Mt. 26:28; the writings of the old covenant, 2 Cor. 3:14

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

διαθήκη διαθήκη, ἡ, διατίθημι a disposition of property by will, a will, testament, Ar., Oratt.

an arrangement between two parties, covenant, Ar., NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSF — Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Covenant

A contract or agreement between two parties. In the Old Testament the Hebrew word berith is always thus translated. Berith is derived from a root which means “to cut,” and hence a covenant is a “cutting,” with reference to the cutting or dividing of animals into two parts, and the contracting parties passing between them, in making a covenant (Gen. 15; Jer. 34:18, 19).

The corresponding word in the New Testament Greek is diatheke, which is, however, rendered “testament” generally in the Authorized Version. It ought to be rendered, just as the word berith of the Old Testament, “covenant.”

This word is used (1) of a covenant or compact between man and man (Gen. 21:32), or between tribes or nations (1 Sam.…

The Heb. berith means primarily "a cutting," with reference to the custom of cutting or dividing animals in two and passing between the parts in ratifying a covenant. (Genesis 15; Jeremiah 34:18,19) In the New Testament the corresponding word is diathece (diatheke), which is frequently translated testament in the Authorized Version. In its biblical meaning two parties the word is used-- Of a covenant between God and man; e.g. God covenanted with Noah, after the flood, that a like judgment should not be repeated. It is not precisely like a covenant between men, but was a promise or agreement by God. The principal covenants are the covenant of works --God promising to save and bless men on condition of perfect obedience --and the covenant of grace , or God’s promise to save men on condition of their believing in Christ and receiving…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The word testamentum is often used in Latin to express the Hebrew word which signifies covenant; whence the titles, Old and New Testaments, are used to denote the old and new covenants. See TESTAMENT.

A covenant is properly an agreement between two parties. Where one of the parties is infinitely superior to the other, as in a covenant between God and man, there God’s covenant assumes the nature of a promise, Isa 59:21 Jer 31:33,34 Ga 3:15-18. The first covenant with the Hebrews was made when the Lord chose Abraham and his posterity for his people; a second covenant, or a solemn renewal of the former, was made at Sinai, comprehending all who observe the law of Moses. The "new covenant" of which Christ is the Mediator and…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Sacred Jos 9:18-21; Ga 3:15

→ Binding Jos 9:18-20; Jer 34:8-21; Eze 17:14-18; Ga 3:15

→ Binding, not only on those who make them, but on those who are represented De 29:14,15

→ Blood of Ex 24:8

→ Book of Ex 24:7

→ The Mosaic law called a covenant Ex 34:28

→ See CONTRACTS

→ See VOWS

→ OF MEN WITH MEN

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
79%covenant
covenant79% · 26×covenants9% · 3×a covenant6% · 2×will6% · 2×

33 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
predicate36%object21%subject21%adverbial18%second object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 33 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐγώκαίand, even, also,οὗτος
καινόςfresh, new
Article theδιάκονοςa waiter, servan
μιμνῄσκωI remember, recall
καίand, even, also,
αὐτός
δίδωμιI offer, give
ἐγώ
παρά
διαθήκηcovenant33×
what comes after →
ὅς
διατίθημιI appoint, makeArticle theποιέωI do, make
Article the
περίἐκχέωI pour out, shedἐπαγγελίαa promise
καινόςfresh, new
μεσίτηςa mediator, go-b
ἅγιοςset apart, holy, sac
αὐτός
ἐν
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδιαθήκη · 33× in the New Testament
Hebrews Galatians 2 Corinthians Acts Luke Romans 1 Corinthians Ephesians Matthew Mark Revelation
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 176 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.85c. AD 40

καταφάσκει καὶ ἐπινεύει λέγων „Ναί, ἰδοὺ Σάρρα ἡ γυνή σου τέξεταί σοι υἱὸν καὶ καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ Ἰσαάκ, καὶ στήσω τὴν διαθήκην μου πρὸς αὐτὸν εἰς διαθήκην αἰώνιον“ (ib.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 17.argc. AD 75–95

Ἡρώδου τελευτὴ καὶ διαθήκη τοῦ αὐτοῦ πρὸς Καίσαρα καὶ μερισμὸς πρὸς τοὺς τρεῖς υἱοὺς αὐτοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.6c. AD 100

ἔτι δὲ καὶ τοῦτο ἐρωτῶ ὑμᾶς ὡς εἶς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὤν, ἰδίως δὲ καὶ πάντας ἀγαπῶν ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, προσέχειν νῦν ἑαυτοῖς καὶ μὴ ὁμοιοῦσθαί τισιν ἐπισωρεύοντας ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν λέγοντας, ὅτι ἡ διαθήκη ἐκείνων καὶ ἡμῶν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Lond. 2 p. 167-169 no. 177Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 40

τῷ δ ἔτει Γαίου Καίσαρος Αὐτοκράτορος Σεβαστοῦ τελευτήσαντος τοῦ προγεγραμμένου μου πατρὸς κατέλειψεν κατὰ διαθήκην τὰ ὑπάρχοντα αὐτοῦ ἐμοί τε καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου Ὀρσενούφι καὶ Σισοΐτι καὶ Πετοβάστι

P.Col. 8 213Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 84–AD 105

πατρός μου Πολυδεύκους τοῦ δεινὸς … τοῦ Πολυδεύκους ἀπὸ κώμης Ἰβιῶνος Εἰκοσιπενταρούρων τελευτὴν ἀπὸ διαθήκης περὶ τὴν προκειμένην κώμην Ἰβιῶνα εἰκοσιπενταρούρων κατοικικῆς ἀρούρας τρεῖς ὄγδοον ἑκκαιδέκατον καὶ γῆς ἀμπελίτιδος

P.Mil.Vogl. 4 226Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 135

αὐτῶι εἰς ἀκοίρωσιν, ἀφʼ ὧν τῶι Ἡρακλείδῃ ὀφειλομένων διαταγέντων ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ τῇ Ἀφροδισίᾳ κατὰ διαθήκην ἐπὶ τοῦ διεληλυθότος ὀκτωκαιδεκάτου ἔτους Ἐπεὶφ ἐννεακαιδεκάτῃ διὰ τοῦ γραφείου Τεβτύνεως καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
ἐνen in G1722 Preposition
2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.
Tyndale gloss
in/on/among
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
τῷho the G3588 Article · dative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DSN — Article · dative · singular · neuter
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
αἵματίahima blood G129 Noun · dative · singular · neuter
97× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Luke than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Blood, literally or figuratively, as in Mark 5:25 and John 1:13. It can refer to the atoning blood of Christ or kindred and bloodshed.
Amplified meaning
the atoning blood of Christ, which is shed for the forgiveness of sins
Tyndale gloss
(Field of) Blood
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word αἷμα (i.e., *haima*) means 'blood' and encompasses various meanings, including literal blood of humans and animals, bloodshed, and metaphorical uses related to kinship and origin. It appears in numerous New Testament passages, notably in contexts of sacrifice and the blood of Christ. Some entries highlight its use in phrases indicating human nature contrasted with divine, while others note its association with color and bloodshed.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αἷμα, ατος, τό,

[in LXX for דָּם;]

blood.

In the ordinary sense: Mk 5:25, Lk 8:43, 44 22:44, Jo 19:34, Ac 15:20, 29 21:25, Re 8:7, 8 11:6 16:3, 4, 6 19:13.

In special senses:

of generation, origin, kinship (cl.): Jo 1:13 (v. MM, VGT, s.v.);

as in OT (AR on Eph, 6:12), in the phrase σάρξ καὶ αἷ. (αἷ. κ. σ.), to indicate human nature as opp. to God and created spirits: Mt 16:17, I Co 15:50, Ga 1:16, Eph 6:12,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αἷμα, -ros, τό, blood, whether of men or of animals; 1. a. simply and generally: Jn. xix. 34; Rev. viii. 7 56. ; xi. 6; xvi. 3 sq. 6” (on which passages cf. Ex. vii. 20 544.) ; xix. 13; ῥύσις αἵματος, Mk. v. 25, [(πηγὴ αἷμ. 29)]; Lk. viii. 43 sq.; θρόμβοι αἵματος, Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]. So also in passages where the eating of blood (and of bloody flesh) is forbidden, Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; cf. Lev. iii. 17; vil. 16 (26); xvii. 10; see Knobel on Ley. vii. 26 sq.; [Kalisch on Lev., Preliminary Essay ὃ 1]; Riickert, Abendmahl, p. 94. ὍὌ. As it was anciently believed that the blood is the seat of the life (Lev. xvii. 11; [cf. Delitzsch, Bibl. Psychol. pp. 238-247 (Eng. trans. p. 281 sqq-)]), the phrase σὰρξ x. αἷμα (D7) 3, a common phrase in Rabbinical writers), or in inverse order αἷμα x. σάρξ, denotes man’s living body compounded of flesh and blood, 1 Co. xv. 50…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αἷμα. An interesting parallel to the common Biblical phrase αἷμα ἐκχέω, especially as it appears in Deut 19’ καὶ οὐκ ἐκχυθήσεται αἷμα ἀναίτιον, is afforded by an inscription found on a tombstone at Rheneia, containing a Jewish ‘‘prayer for vengeance,” Sy// 816°* (i/A.D.) ἐγχέαντας αὐτῆς τὸ ἀναίτιον αἷμα ἀδίκως : see the full discussion in Deissmann 2.42 p. 4231. For the use of αἷμα, as in Jn 11", cf. P Lips I. 28! (a.p. 381) mp[d]s τὸ εἶναί cov vilo]y γνήσιον καὶ πρωτότοκον ὡς ἐξ ἰδίου αἵματος γεννηθέντα σοι. In P Leid C (verso) 119 (p. 118 —B.c. 161) two men appear in a dream saying Πτολεμαῖος, λαβὲ to[is] χαλκοὺς τοῦ αἵματος : they count out a purseful and say to one of the Twins εἰδοὺ τοὺς χαλκοὺς Tod αἵματος. Leemans quotes an opinion that this meant the price of a victim, and compares Mt 27% In the sense of murder or blood-guiltiness it finds modern support in the Pontic dialect…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αἷμα (ahima) — blood.

αἷμα, ατος, τό,

blood, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: in plural, streams of blood, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. of anything like blood, Βακχίου[LXX+5th c.BC+]

2. b dye obtained from ἄγχουσα, alkanet, [Refs]

3. with collateral meaning of spirit, courage, οὐκ ἔχων αἷμα pale, spiritless [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. bloodshcd, murder, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅμαιμον αἷ. a kinsman's murder, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; εἴργασται μητρῷον αἷ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἶ. πράττειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἷμα τραγοκτόνον shedding of goat's blood, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐφ᾽ αἵματι φεύγειν to avoid trial for murder by going into exile, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: plural in this sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἵματασύγγονα brothers' corpses, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —concrete, νεακόνητον αἷ. keen-edged death, i. e. a sword, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αἷμα

haima

of uncertain derivation; blood, literally (of men or animals),

figuratively (the juice of grapes) or specially (the atoning blood of

Christ); by implication, bloodshed, also kindred:--blood.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αἷμα, ατος, τό

n.n.

blood

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αἱμα haima 97x

blood; of the color of blood; bloodshed; blood-guiltiness; natural descent

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αἷμα blood, Hom., etc.; in pl. streams of blood, Trag.

bloodshed, murder, Aesch., etc.: —ἐφ᾽ αἵματι φεύγειν to avoid trial for murder by going into exile, Dem.; so, αἷμα φεύγειν Eur.

like Lat. sanguis, blood-relationship, kin, Soph., Hom., etc.; ὁ πρὸς αἵματος one of the blood or race, Soph.; μητρὸς τῆς ἐμῆς ἐν αἵματι akin to her by blood, Aesch.

Deriv. uncertain.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DSN — Noun · dative · singular · neuter
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

blud (dam, probably from 'adham "to be red"; haima): Used in the Old Testament to designate the life principle in either animal or vegetable, as the blood of man or the juice of the grape (Le 17:11, et al.); in the New Testament for the blood of an animal, the atoning blood of Christ, and in both Old Testament and New Testament in a figurative sense for bloodshed or murder (Ge 37:26; Ho 4:2; Re 16:6).

1. Primitive Ideas:

Although the real function of the blood in the human system was not fully known until the fact of its circulation was established by William Harvey in 1615, nevertheless from the earliest times a singular mystery has been attached to it by all peoples. Blood…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Blood

(1.) As food, prohibited in Gen. 9:4, where the use of animal food is first allowed. Comp. Deut. 12:23; Lev. 3:17; 7:26; 17:10-14. The injunction to abstain from blood is renewed in the decree of the council of Jerusalem (Acts 15:29). It has been held by some, and we think correctly, that this law of prohibition was only ceremonial and temporary; while others regard it as still binding on all. Blood was eaten by the Israelites after the battle of Gilboa (1 Sam. 14:32-34).

(2.) The blood of sacrifices was caught by the priest in a basin, and then sprinkled seven times on the altar; that of the passover on the…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

To blood is ascribed in Scripture the mysterious sacredness which belongs to life, and God reserved it to himself when allowing man the dominion over and the use of the lower animals for food. Thus reserved, it acquires a double power: (1) that of sacrificial atonement; and (2) that of becoming a curse when wantonly shed, unless duly expiated. (Genesis 9:4; Leviticus 7:26; 17:11-13)

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The life of all animals was regarded as especially in the blood, which was a sacred and essential part of the sacrifices offered to God, Heb 9:22. It was solemnly sprinkled upon the altar and the mercy seat, "for it is the blood that maketh atonement for the soul," Le 17:1-16 the life of the victim for the life of the sinner. It was therefore most sacredly associated with the blood of the Lamb of God which "cleanseth us from all sin," Eph 1:7 1Jo 1:7. Hence the strict prohibition renewed in Ac 15:29. In direct opposition to this are the heathen customs of drinking the blood of animals and even of men- of eating raw flesh, with the blood, and even fresh cut from the living…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
98%blood
blood98% · 98×from blood2% · 2×

100 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial42%object21%subject19%predicate17%indirect object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 97 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνκαίand, even, also,διά
καίand, even, also, nam
σάρξflesh, bodyεἰδωλόθυτοςsacrificed to anἸησοῦςJesus
ἐν
σχεδόνnearly, almostἐνιαυτόςa yearμέγας
ῥύσιςa flowing, an issue
ἐν
εἰς
σελήνηthe moonαὐτός
αἷμαblood97×
what comes after →
Article the
Χριστόςanointed, the Meδιαθήκηa covenant, willἀρνίονa lamb
καίand, even, also, nam
πνικτόςstrangledσάρξflesh, bodyArticle the
αὐτός
ἐπίκαίand, even, also,σῴζωI save, heal
ἐγώ
Article theἀληθήςunconcealed, truἐκ
ἸησοῦςJesus
Χριστόςanointed, the MeArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαἷμα · 97× in the New Testament
Hebrews Revelation Acts Matthew Luke John 1 Corinthians 1 John Ephesians Mark Romans 1 Peter
Across the New Testament14 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 223 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.91c. AD 40

εἰπάτω γάρ, τίς τέ ἐστι καὶ ποταπός, πνεῦμα ἢ αἷμα ἢ πῦρ ἢ ἀὴρ ἢ ἕτερόν τι [σῶμα], ἢ τοσοῦτόν γε ὅτι σῶμά ἐστιν ἢ πάλιν ἀσώματον.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.102c. AD 75–95

δεσπότας γὰρ ἁπάντων ὑμᾶς εἶναι πεποίηκα τῶν τε χερσαίων καὶ νηκτῶν καὶ ὅσα τὴν μετάρσιον αἰώραν ἔχει καὶ φοράν, χωρὶς αἵματος·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.5c. AD 100

πλήρης εἰμὶ ὁλοκαυτωμάτων, καὶ στέαρ ἀρνῶν καὶ αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων οὐ βούλομαι, οὐδ̓ ἂν ἔρχησθε ὀφθῆναί μοι, τίς γὰρ ἐξεζήτησεν ταῦτα ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν ὑμῶν;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. BC
P.Tebt. 3.2 730Tebtynis (Arsinoites)179 BC

τῆι ε τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος μηνὸς ἐφοδεύων … τὰ περὶ τὴν κώμην πεδία εὗρον ἔκχυσιν αἵματος , πυνθάνομαι δὲ τῶν ἐκ τῆς κώμης Θεόδοτον Δωσιθέου ἐξελθόντα ὡς ἐπὶ ταῦτα μηκέτʼ

P.Oslo 3 95OxyrhynchosAD 96

τοῦ ὑπηρέτου εὗρον ἐπὶ τῷ μέσῳ δακτύλῳ τραῦμα , ὃ καὶ θεραπεύω, καὶ συνδρομὴν αἵματος ἐπὶ τῷ μαστῷ καὶ ἐξεμοῦσαν καὶ πυρέττουσαν. διὸ προσφωνῶ. ἔτους ιε Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Δομιτιανοῦ

P.Laur. 3 60OxyrhynchosAD 201–AD 300

θύραν ἐπισφραγεῖσαν ἀνεωγμένην … ων … τῶν χοίρων ἓξ χοίραν μίαν … α τὸ αἷμα ἀπέκειτο

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
μουegō of Me G3165 Personal pronoun · first person · genitive · singular
1,872× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Tyndale gloss
I/we
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐγώ, gen, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς,

pers. pron.

I.

The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mt 3:11, Mk 1:8, Lk 3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mt 10:16, Jo 10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. I Ki 3:8), Ac 9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jo 1:23 (LXX), Ac 7:32 (LXX).

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐγώ, gen. ἐμοῦ, enclitic pod; dat. ἐμοί, enclitic μοί; acc. ἐμέ, enclitic μέ; plur. ἡμεῖς, ete.; personal pronoun, J. 1. The nominatives ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, when joined to a verb, generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis, as Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (ἐγὼ pev... ὁ δέ); Mt. iii. 14 (ἐγὼ... ἔχω, καὶ σύν ; V. 22, 28, 39, and often; ἡμεῖς, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ἡμεῖς x. of Φαρισαῖοι, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them, as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; οἵ. B. §129, 12. ἰδοὺ ἐγώ, 1397, behold me, hereamT: Acts ix.10 (1S. iii. 8). ἐγώ, like 38, Jam: Jn. i. 23; Acts vii. 32, [ef. W.585 (544); B. 125 (109)]. 2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace. are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with prepositions: ἔμπροσθέν pov, Jn. i. 15; ὀπίσω…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐγώ. Deissmann (ZAZ p. 134 ff.) has drawn attention to the parallels to the solemn use of the first personal pronoun in the Fourth Gospel that may be adduced from inscriptions and magical texts. Thus in an inscr. in honour of Isis from Ios, written in ii/iii A.p., the contents of which are preChristian, we find —Elows ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ τ[ύρανν]ος πάσης χόρας.. ἐγὼ νόμους ἀνθρώποις ἐθέμην . . ἐγώ εἰμι Kpdvov θυγάτηρ πρεσβυτάτη α΄. And similarly in the magical papyrus P Lond 4645 (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 69) ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ἀκέφαλος δαίμων . . ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἀλήθεια ὁ μεισῶν ἀδικήματα γείνεσθαι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ α΄. With the construction of the phrase τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ; in Jn 24 we may compare BGU IV. 1141°8 (n.c. 14) ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ διαστολὰς μηδὲν αὐτῶι καὶ ἐκείνωι εἶναι : for its meaning see Ε΄. C. Burkitt in 77:5 xiii. p- 594f., where it is rendered, ‘‘ What have I and thou to do with that ?” On the difficult…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μέ (me) — me.

ἐγώ,

I: pronoun of the first person:—Epic dialect mostly ἐγών before vowels (so in Doric dialect, before consonants, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἱών [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:— strengthened ἔγωγε, I at least, for my part, indeed, for myself (more frequently in Attic dialect than in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Doric dialect ἐγώνγα [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Boeotian dialect ἱώνγα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἱώνει [Refs]; ἰώγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Laconian dialect and Tarentum dialect ἐγώνη, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. oblique cases from a different root, genitive ἐμοῦ, enclitic μο; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μευ, also ἐμέθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἔμεθεν [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἐμέος, ἐμεῦς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἐμοῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+] — _dative_ ἐμοί, enclitic μοι (which may be compared with Sanskrit…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐγώ

me

a shorter (and probably originally) from of 1691; me:--I, me, my.

see GREEK for 1691

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐγώ egō 2x

I, gen., ἐμοῦ [μου], dat., ἐμοί [μοι], acc., ἐμέ [με]

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-1GS — Personal pronoun · first person · genitive · singular
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-1GS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: first Case: Genitive Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
35%us
us35% · 717×me32% · 644×mine20% · 402×we ourselves6% · 124×my2% · 45×other renderings5% · 97×

2,029 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 27 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
τὸho which G3588 Article · nominative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSN — Article · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
which19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
ὑπὲρhuper for G5228 Preposition
154× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Luke than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Above or for something, often used to describe doing something for someone's benefit. In Matthew 5:44 and Romans 10:1, it means praying for or on behalf of others.
Tyndale gloss
above/for
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὑπέρ (transliterated as *huper*) is a preposition meaning 'over' or 'above' when used with the genitive case, and it can imply 'for' or 'on behalf of' in various contexts. It appears frequently in the New Testament, particularly in discussions of Christ's sacrificial death, such as in Matthew 5:44 and Romans 5:6-8. The word can also express excess or superiority when used with the accusative case.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — ὑπέρ, ἀντι from a scan

Ir has been often claimed, and in the interests of an all-important truth, namely the vicarious character of the sacrifice of the death of Christ, that in such passages as Met. 4i;-93 Tit. i. 14: 1 Tim. 11. 6; Gal. 111: 13+ Luke REM 19, 203 1 Pet. 11. 21: 11.133 iv.1; Rom. v.38; John x. 15, in all of which Christ is said to have died ὑπὲρ πάντων, UTEP ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ τῶν προβάτων, and the like, ὑπέρ shall be accepted as equipollent with ἀντί. And then, it is further urged that, as ἀντί is the preposition first of equivalence (Homer, Jl. ix. 116, 117) and then of exchange (1 Cor. xi. 15; Heb. xii. 2, 16; Matt. v. 38), ὑπέρ must in all those passages be regarded as having the same force. Each of these, it is evident, would thus become a dictum probans for a truth, in itself most vital, namely that Christ suffered, not merely on our behalf and for our good, but also in our stead, and bearing…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὑπέρ (when following subst.—poët.—ὕπερ; so as adv., II Co 11:23),

prep. c. gen., acc.

C. gen., primarily of place (rest or motion), over, above, across, beyond, hence, metaph.,

for, on behalf of: of prayer, Mt 5:44, Ac 8:24, Ro 10:1, Ja 5:16, al.; of laying down life, Jo 10:11, Ro 9:3, al.; esp. of Christ giving his life for man's redemption, Mk 14:24, Jo 10:15, Ac 21:13, Ro 5:6-8, al.; opp. to κατά,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησεν (μὴ γνόντα is said agreeably to the judgment of ὁ ποιήσας), 2 Co. ν. 21 (τὸν οὐ γνόντα would be equiv. to ἀγνοοῦντα). in predictions, where it expresses the opinion of those who predict: ἔσῃ σιωπῶν καὶ μὴ δυνάμενος λαλῆσαι, Lk. i. 20; ἔσῃ τυφλὸς μὴ βλέπων, Acts xiii. 11. where the writer or speaker does ποῦ regard the thing itself so much as the thought of the thing, which he wishes to remove from the mind of the reader or hearer (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 666), — to be rendered without ete. (Germ. ohne zu with inf.) [ef. B. § 148, 7 b.]: ἐξῆλθε μὴ ἐπιστάμενος, ποῦ ἔρχεται, Heb. xi. 8; add, Mt. xxii. 12; Lk. xiii. 11 [(but ef. B. § 148, 7¢.)]; Acts v. 7; xx. 22; Heb.ix.9. where the participles have a conditional, causal, or concessive force, and may be resolved into clauses introduced by if, on condition that, etc. : θερίσομεν μὴ ἐκλυόμενοι, Gal. vi. 9; μὴ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὑπέρ. From its original locative meaning ‘‘ over” (as in P Par 1145 (B.C. 117) τὰ μὲν ὑπὲρ [γῆς], ταῦθ᾽ ὑπὸ γῆς), ὑπέρ came to be applied in a variety of ways. I. c. gen. (a) = ‘‘for,” ‘‘on behalf of,” ‘‘in the place of”: P Tebt I. 6% (B.c, 140-139) ἐπιτ]ελεῖν τὰ νομιζόμενα τοῖς θεοῖς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν Kal τῶν τ[έκ]νων, ‘to pay the customary offerings to the gods on behalf of us and our children” (Edd.), P Oxy IV. 743°° (B.c. 2) συνπροσγενέσθαι αὐτῶι ὡς ἀνθομολογη(σομένῳ᾽ ὑπέρ cov οὕτως ὡς ὑπίέρ) pov, ‘‘stand by him, as he will agree in everything for you just as for me”’ (Edd.), and BGU I. 246} (ii/iii a..) γυκτὸς Kal ἡμέρας ἐντυνχάνω TO θεῷ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν. Cf. also crane, ὑπερ with Mk 9*° the Christian P Iand I. 168 (v/vi A.D.) τὸ νόμιμον ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἐστιν, and with 1 Cor 152% A/iche/ 1001: 10 (will of Epicteta—c. B.C. 200) τοῦ kal κατασκεναξαμένου τὸ μουσεῖον ὑπὲρ τοῦ μεταλλαχότος ἁμῶν υἱοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὑπέρ (huper) — above/for.

ὑπέρ [ῠ],

Epic dialect also ὑπείρ, used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] ὁπέρ (which see): in Aeolic dialect replaced by περί (see. περί [Refs 4th c.BC+] also dative (Cf. Sanskrit upaári 'above', Gothic ufar, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] ofer 'over':—from it are formed the comparative and superlative ὑπέρτερος, -τατος, also adverb ὕπερθεν, and Nouns ὑπέρα, ὕπερος.)

__A WITH GENIT.,

__A.I of Place, over;

__A.I.1 in a state of rest, over, above, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; χιτωνίσκους ἐνεδεδύκεσαν ὑ. γονάτων not reaching to the knees, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; στῆ δ᾽ ἄρ᾽ ὑ. κεφαλῆς stood over his head as he lay asleep, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑ. κεφαλῆς οἱ ἐγίνετο διεξελαύνοντι over head, i. e. over the gateway, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ὑ. κεφαλῆς the higher ground, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἰονίας ὑ. ἁλὸς οἰκέων on the Ionian sea…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὑπέρ

huper

a primary preposition; "over", i.e. (with the genitive case) of place,

above, beyond, across, or causal, for the sake of, instead, regarding;

with the accusative case superior to, more than:--(+ exceeding,

abundantly) above, in (on) behalf of, beyond, by, + very chiefest,

concerning, exceeding (above, -ly), for, + very highly, more (than),

of, over, on the part of, for sake of, in stead, than, to(-ward),

very. In the comparative, it retains many of the above applications.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὑπέρ

Prep.

in behalf of, above

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὑπέρ hyper 150x

(1) gen., above, over; met. in behalf of, Mt. 5:44; Mk. 9:40; Jn. 17:19; instead of beneficially, Phlm. 13; in maintenance of, Rom. 15:8; for the furtherance of, Jn. 11:4; 2 Cor. 1:6, 8; for the realization of, Phil. 2:13; equivalent to περί, about, concerning, with the further signification of interest or concern in the subject, Acts 5:41; Rom. 9:27; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὑπέρ over, above, w. gen, over, beyond, w. acc.

Lat. super:—hence are formed comp. and Sup. ὑπέρτερος, -τατος.

WITH GENIT.,

of Place, over, above:

in a state of rest, στέρνον ὑπὲρ μαζοῖο Il.; ὑπὲρ κεφαλῆς στῆναί τινι to stand over his head, Hom.: of countries, above, further inland, οἰκέοντες ὑπὲρ Ἁλικαρνησσοῦ μεσόγαιαν Hdt.

in a state of motion, over, across, ὑπὲρ θαλάσσης καὶ χθονὸς ποτωμένοις Aesch.

over, beyond, ὑπὲρ πόντου Od.

metaph., from the notion of standing over to protect, for, for defence of, in behalf of, ἑκατόμβην ῥέξαι ὑπὲρ Δαναῶν Il.; θύειν ὑπὲρ τῆς πόλεως Xen.; ὑπὲρ τῆς πατρίδος ἀμύνειν to fight for one's country, etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

for (ki (conjunction), le, from 'el (preposition), and various other words. In the New Testament also the words are various, chiefly gar, kai gar, hoti (conjunctions); anti apo eis dia (accusative), epi (dative and accusative), peri (genitive), pros (genitive and accusative), huper (genitive) (prepositions)): the English Revised Version and the American Standard Revised Version give in many cases more literal or more accurate renderings than those in the King James Version.

In the New Testament the most important preps. from a doctrinal point of view are anti, "face to face," "over against," "instead," "on behalf of," peri, "around," "about," "concerning," huper, "over," "on behalf of." The first has been claimed as stating the substitutionary nature of Christ's sacrifice as contrasted with huper and peri, more frequently used of it. But, although anti in the New Testament often means…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
65%for
for65% · 102×above7% · 11×on behalf of5% · 8×concerning5% · 8×beyond3% · 5×about3% · 5×on behalf3% · 4×other renderings4% · 6×other renderings6% · 9×

158 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 17 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial87%predicate8%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 154 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐγώὑστερέωI am lacking, faσῶμαbody, flesh
θεόςGod, a god
Article theχάριςgrace, favor, ki
ἐγώ
κατάψυχήthe soul, life, θλῖψιςpersecution, aff
σύ
κατάψυχήthe soul, life, δέομαιI request, beg
ἀποθνῄσκωI am dying, am about
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thἸησοῦςJesusτὶς
ὑπέρfor154×
what comes after →
Article the
ὄνομαname, character,ψυχήthe soul, life, σύ
ἐγώ
πρόςἵναin order that, sοὐNeg
σύ
καίand, even, also,καυχάομαιI boast, gloryἐν
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ἀποθνῄσκωI am dying, am aArticle theσύ
ὅς
ἐγώΧριστόςanointed, the MeγράφωI write

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὑπέρ · 154× in the New Testament
2 Corinthians Romans John Ephesians Hebrews 1 Corinthians Acts Colossians Philippians Luke Matthew Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament22 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.70c. AD 75–95

ὑπὲρ δὲ τοῦ μὴ διαφυγεῖν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τὰ ηὑρημένα μηδὲ πρὶν εἰς γνῶσιν ἐλθεῖν φθαρῆναι, προειρηκότος ἀφανισμὸν Ἀδάμου τῶν ὅλων ἔσεσθαι τὸν μὲν κατʼ ἰσχὺν πυρὸς τὸν ἕτερον δὲ κατὰ βίαν καὶ πλῆθος ὕδατος, στήλας δύο ποιησάμενοι τὴν μὲν ἐκ πλίνθου…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν Πτολεμαίδι.

P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

τριακοσίων · καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Ψενενοῦπιν ἐπὶ τὸν Ἁρσιῆσιν μήτʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ περὶ τοῦ διασαφουμένου μέρους γῆς τρόπῳ μηδενί. εἰ δὲ μή, ἀποτεισάτω Ἁρσιήσει ἐπίτιμον

P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

μοι ἄπρατον γῆς ἀρουρῶν γ, καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Κολλούθην μήδʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸν Ὧρον μήδʼ ἐπʼ ἄλλον μηδένα τῶν παρʼ αὐτοῦ περὶ τῶν ἀρουρῶν

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
ὑμῶνsu you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural
2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.
Amplified meaning
on your behalf, for your benefit
Tyndale gloss
you
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-2GP — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2GP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
78%you
you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg
ἐν
Article theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
πρός
ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de
σύyou2892×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
ἐν
Article theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

and the cup likewise after the eating saying; This <the> cup [is] the new covenant in the blood of Me which for you is being poured out.
ἐκχυννόμενον.ekcheō is being poured out. G1632 Verb · present · passive · participle · nominative · singular · neuter
27× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To pour something out is what this word means. It's used in Revelation 16:1-4 to describe pouring out a bowl of God's wrath. The Bible also uses it to describe shedding blood or pouring out one's heart.
Amplified meaning
shed, given
Tyndale gloss
to pour out
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐκχέω (i.e., *ekcheō*) means 'to pour out' and is derived from the prefix ἐκ (out) and χέω (to pour). It covers a range of meanings, including the literal act of pouring liquids and metaphorical uses such as bestowing or giving oneself up to emotions. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like the shedding of blood (e.g., Mt 26:28) and the outpouring of the Spirit (e.g., Acts 2:17).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐκ-χέω also Hellenistic, ἐκχύνω (in Th.: II Ki 14:14 *), and ἐκχύννω (q.v.)

[in LXX chiefly for שָׁפַךְ ;]

to pour out: φιάλην, Re 16:1-4, 8, 10, 12, 17; κέρματα, Jo 2:15; αἷμα, Mt 23:35 (cf. MM, Exp., xii), Lk 11:50, Ac 22:20, Ro 3:15 (LXX) Re 16:6. Pass., αἷμα, Mt 26:28, Mk 14:24, Ac 22:20; οἶνος, Mt 9:17, Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐκχέω. With Mt 2335 cf. Sy// 8165 (ii/B.c.) (= Deissmann Δ 4.5 Ρ. 424) ἐγχέαντας αὐτῆς τὸ ἀναίτιον αἷμα ἀδικῶς. For the subst. see P Tebt I. 86᾽ (late 11,8.6.) ἐκχύ(σεως) Ἵππωνος Bada(velov), P Lond 11778* (A.D. 113) (-- ΠῚ. p- 183) ἐκχύσεων, and for a previously unknown adj. see P Oxy IX. 122018 (iii/A.D.) πέμψις μοι τοὺς ἐκχυσιαίους ἥλους, “* you will send me the nails for emptying (?) ” (Ed.). For other compound forms cf. P Ryl II. 154** (A.D. 66) λιβὸς διῶρυξ λεγομένηι ᾿Αρχείου SV οὗ (/. Hs) ἀποχεῖεται (Z. ἀποχεῖται) 6 κλῆρ[ο]ς, ‘fon the west the dyke called that of Archias by which the holding is drained,” and 18 διῶρυξ εἰς dv (Δ ἣν) cioxetra[t] ὁ κλῆρ[ος, “‘the dyke into which the holding…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐκχέω (ekcheō) — to pour out.

ἐκχέω

(laterἐκφων-χύνω [NT], etc., condemned by [Refs 2nd c.AD+]future -χέω (see. χέω): aorist 1 ἐξέχεα (also imperative ἔκχυσον [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Epic dialect aorist middle ἐκχευάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect ἐκκέχῠκα [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—pour out, properly of liquids, οἶνον [NT+8th c.BC+]; ἀναίτιον αἷμα [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; πηγάς [Refs 5th c.BC+]is spilt, [NT] he poured forth his arrows, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__b pour away: hence, spill, a vessel, ποδάνιπτρον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν χόα Men.[same place]:—passive, to be drained, εἰς [διώρυχα] [Refs 1st c.AD+]

2. of words, pour forth, utter, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. pour out like water, squander, waste, ὄλβον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; spoil, τὸ πᾶν σόφισμα [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐκχέω ἐκχύνω ἐκχύννω

ekcheo

ekchuno ek-khoo'-no

from 1537 and cheo (to pour); to pour forth; figuratively, to

bestow:--gush (pour) out, run greedily (out), shed (abroad, forth),

spill.

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐκχέω

v.

I pour out, shed

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐκχέω ekcheō 16x

also formed as ἐκχύννομαι (11x), to pour out, Rev. 16:1, 2, 3; to shed blood, Mt. 26:28; Mk. 14:24; pass. to gush out, Acts 1:18; to spill, scatter, Mt. 9:17; Jn. 2:15; met. to give largely, bestow liberally, Acts 2:17, 18, 33; 10:45; pass. to rush headlong into anything, be abandoned to, Jude 11

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐκχέω fut. -χεῶ aor1 ἐξέχεα epic ἔκχευα mid. ἐκχευάμην to pour out, properly of liquids, Il., Aesch., etc.: metaph., in Med., ἐκχεύατ᾽ ὀϊστούς he poured forth his arrows, Od.

of words, Aesch., etc.

to pour out like water, squander, waste, one's substance, id. Aesch., etc.

Pass., 3rd pl. plup. ἐξεκέχυντο, epic syncop. aor2 ἐξέχυ^το or ἔκχυ^το, part. ἐκχύμενος [υ^]:— to pour out, stream out or forth, properly of liquids, Hom.:—metaph. of persons, id. Hom.: —generally, to be spread out, Od.

to be poured out like water, forgotten, Theogn., Plat.

to give oneself up to joy, to be overjoyed, Ar.; ἐκχ. γελῶν to burst out laughing, Anth.

to lie languidly, id. Anth.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PPP-NSN — Verb · present · passive · participle · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PPP-NSN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
37%poured out
poured out37% · 10×being poured out15% · 4×i will pour out7% · 2×has been poured out7% · 2×he poured out7% · 2×gushed out4% · 1×he has poured out4% · 1×shed4% · 1×other renderings15% · 4×

27 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 27 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
μέσοςmiddle, in the mὑπάγωI go away, deparπρῶτοςfirst, before
Article the
διαθήκηa covenant, willπροφήτηςa prophet, poet
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,πούςthe foot
θεόςGod, a god
Article the
οἶνοςwine
Article the
ἐκχέωis being poured out.27×
what comes after →
Article the
φιάληa shallow and flκέρμαa small coinαἷμαblood
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theαἷμαblood
ἀπό
Article theκαταβολήa foundation, de
ἐπί
Article theἐγώ
εἰς
ἄφεσιςdeliverance, par

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐκχέω · 27× in the New Testament
Revelation Acts Luke Matthew Romans John Jude Mark Titus
Across the New Testament9 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 88 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 158c. AD 40

σιτοπόνων τε γὰρ καὶ ὀψαρτυτῶν κάματον ἐπιλιχνεύει καὶ τῆς ἀπὸ τῶν ἡδυσμάτων κνίσσης ἐν κύκλῳ τὴν κεφαλὴν περιάγων μεταλαμβάνειν [τῆς εἰδεχθείας] ὀρέγεται, καὶ ὁπότε πολυτελῆ τράπεζαν θεάσαιτο, καταβαλὼν αὑτὸν ὅλον ἐπὶ τὰ εὐτρεπισθέντα ἐκχεῖται,…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.273c. AD 75–95

κελευσθεὶς δὲ καὶ τοῦ πλησίον ὕδατος λαβὼν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν ἐκχέαι ὁρᾷ τὴν χρόαν αἱματώδη γενομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Mich. 5 256ArsinoitesAD 29–AD 30

βορρᾶ Ψενοβάστιος κλῆρος, λιβὸς διῶρυξ διʼ οὗ ποτίζεται ὁ κλῆρος, ἀπηλιώτου διῶρυξ διʼ οὗ ἐκχεῖται ὁ κλῆρος. καὶ ἀπέχω παρὰ τοῦ Ὀρσενούφιος τὸ ἑσταμένον ἀργυρικὸν παραχωρητικὸν πᾶν κεφάλαιον καὶ

P.Mich. 5 263Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 35–AD 36

ὦσιν ἐν μιᾷ σφραγῖδι, ὧν ὧν γείτονες νότου δημοσία διῶρυξ διʼ ἧς ποτίζεται καὶ ἐκχεῖται ὁ κλῆρος, βορρᾶ χῶμα Χομηνιακῆς διώρυγος, λιβὸς τοῦ πριαμένου Πνεβτύνεως κλῆρος, ἀπηλιώτου Μαρεψήμιος τοῦ

P.Coll.Youtie 1 19Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 44

ὁ τῶν τέκνων Εὐάνδρου ἐλαιὼν ἀνὰ μέσον οὔσης τῆς διώρυγος διʼ ἧς ποτίζεται καὶ ἐκχεῖται ὁ κλῆρος, ἀπηλιώτου ὁ πρότερον … οττιου κλῆρος, νυνὶ δὲ Ἀλκίμου τοῦ Ἀλκίμου ἐλαιών,

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate